Agfa CR35-CR25 Serice Manual

ReadMeFirst Service Manual for Download

HEALTHCARE Imaging Services

►

Purpose of this Document This document describes how to

►

•

add the “order list for documentation”.

•

print.

•

add comments.

Document History Edition. Revision

Release Date

Changes compared to previous Version 1.1

1.2

06-2008

Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a printed manual. See section 1.

Edition 1, Revision 2 06-2008 printed in Germany Agfa Company Confidential

Document Node ID: 16099429

Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

ReadMeFirst

1

Integrating the Order List for Documentation IMPORTANT: The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download. Purpose of the “order list for documentation”: To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual. (1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest. (2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for Documentation”. (3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer. (4) When creating a paper manual: Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.

2

Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

IMPORTANT: Preferably print this manual double-sided: This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided. If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages. Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if available. Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 1, Revision 2 06-2008

Page 2 of 5 Agfa Company Confidential

ReadMeFirst

2.1

Printing single Pages or Chapters To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows: (1)

Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.

(2)

Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar (3)

Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4)

Select "Print".

(5)

Select the page range.

(6)

Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".

(7)

Select “OK”.

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters




ReadMeFirst

NOTE: “Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions “reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.

2.2

Printing the complete Service Manual To print the complete service manual proceed as follows: (1)

Select "Print".

(2)

Select “All”.

(3)

Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center" (see NOTE above).

(4)

Select “OK”.

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

3

Adding Comments •

If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will show-up.

•

This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text manipulations.

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar




ReadMeFirst

3.1

Exporting your Comments NOTE: Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.

(1)

In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".

Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”

3.2

(2)

Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.

(3)

Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.

(4)

Save the file with any name.

Importing Comments (1)

In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".

(2)

Select “Options - Import Comments”.

(3)

Browse for the comments file and press “select”.

NOTE: The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the comments have been imported has a different number of pages.




HEALTHCARE

Service Manual

Imaging Services

Document No: DD+DIS219.06E

CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

2nd Edition

CR 35-X

CR 25.0

Type 5158 / 100

Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

01-2007 printed in Germany Agfa Company Confidential

Document Node ID: 12434149 eq_00_about manual_e_template_v02

Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare

DD+DIS219.06E

►

About this Manual

Manufacturer Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH Tegernseer Landstraße 161 D - 81539 München Germany

WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries. INSTRUCTION: (1)

Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document (see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the equipment.

(2)

Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on the product.



CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

Chapter 0 / 2 Agfa Company Confidential

DD+DIS219.06E

►

About this Manual

Purpose of this document This document provides information on the structure and contents of the Service Manual.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006

compared to previous Edition 1: •

Only layout changes as CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) is also integrated in this Service Documentation, DD+DIS219.06E.





DD+DIS219.06E

►

About this Manual

Chapter Overview

Chapter 0

Order List

1

Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

2

Functional Description

3

Repair and Service 3.1

Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

3.2

Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

3.3

Troubleshooting

3.4

Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

3.5

Replacement of Parts

3.6

Adjustments and Calibrations

3.7

Software Menus and Setting

3.8

Software Releases, Patches

3.9

FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions

4

Reference and Circuit Diagrams

5

Spare Parts List

6

Accessories

7

Field Modifications

8

Manufacturing Standard Modifications

9

Maintenance

10

Service Bulletins

11

Installation Planning

12

Glossary

1

2

3





DD+DIS219.06E

►

About this Manual

Explanation of notes

This documentation uses: Safety relevant notes Icon

Signal Word

Situation

CAUTION:

Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the consequence.

WARNING:

Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.

DANGER:

Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the consequence.

Not-safety relevant notes Icon

Name

Type of Information

INSTRUCTION:

Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the described actions.

IMPORTANT:

Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to prevent malfunction.

NOTE:

• • • •

►

Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without having a direct influence on the step or action. Highlights unusual points Indicates background information Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user interface.

Conventions

Actions

Way of writing

Sample

Action, explanation

Switch the machine on

Switch the machine on

Action with the mouse or the "Return" key

Double-click the icon

Required text input via the keyboard

vips

Enter vips and click on





DD+DIS219.06E

1

About this Manual

About this Manual 2nd Edition CR 35-X Type 5158/100 / CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 Service Documentation (DD+DIS219.06E)

IMPORTANT: The 2nd Edition of the Service Documentation for CR 35-X Type 5158/100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 , DD+DIS219.06E is valid for: • CR 35-X – Type 5158/100 and for • CR 25.0 – Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) Explanation: The improved detector unit (light guide and photomultiplier) from CR 35-X is integrated in CR 25.0 and hence the new subtype CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 has been created. The improvement is not available for CR 25.0 type 5156/100. The Digitizer CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 has been introduced in production and can be distinguished from CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 by the type label: • Type: 5156/105 • Serial Number SN: ≥ 6000

Note that this Service Documentation is not valid for the other type of CR 25.0 as: • CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 For the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 only the CR 25.0 Service Documentation, DD+DIS071.04E is valid. Reason for the nd

2

Edition

The 2nd Edition of this Documentation has been released due to the fact that the former CR 35-X Service Documentation from now on is also valid for the CR 25.0 Type 5156/105. Only the layout of the Service Documentation and product specific safety notes have been adapted. No changes of the content have been made.





DD+DIS219.06E

Product Description

About this Manual

The CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) digitizer is the follow-up model of the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 digitizer. It has been designed for General Radiology environments and, particularly, for the CR Mammography Solution. Main changes between CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 and CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) are: • Acrylic light guide with glued PMT (PhotoMultiplier Tube) is used instead of optical fibers.

Download from MedNet

Features of the Digitizer

This Service Documentation is available on the MedNet GSO Library. Path: Computed Radiography /CR Digitizers / CR 35-X

The CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) scans the exposed CR image plate, converts the information into digital data and automatically transfers the image to the image processing station for further processing and visualization. The digitizer requires but little manual interaction. All you have to do, after exposure and identification of the cassette, is to insert it into the digitizer. The digitizer takes in the cassette, reads the demographic data and routing information from the memory chip in the cassette, opens the cassette, removes the image plate and scans the latent image by means of a deflected laser beam. Once the image is digitized, the cassette is returned to the cassette slot. Depending on the X-ray intensity which has affected the phosphor during the exposure, more or less light will be emitted during laser scanning. The light is converted into an electrical signal. This signal is then converted into a digital bit stream. Once converted into digital form, the digitized image is transferred to the image processing station for further processing and visualization.





DD+DIS219.06E

Further Features of the Digitzer

About this Manual

Further features of the CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) include: • The digitizer permits assigning the status “emergency” to an image. An emergency image will be given priority by the image processing station if the “Emergency” key is pressed before inserting an unidentified cassette. • The digitizer permits re-erasing an image plate before re-using it. In specific cases, this is necessary to prevent ghost images caused by previous exposures or stray radiation from interfering with the image of interest. • If the digitizer is dedicated to one ID Station, additional features are available:

Intended Use of the digitizer

•

quickly identifying cassettes without the need for an ID Tablet

•

reading the identification data of a cassette

•

initializing a cassette, i.e. changing the image plate type

This CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an erasable image plate (IP). This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a workstation where the resulting digital image information is further processed and routed. It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment by qualified staff.





Document No: DD+DIS219.06E Copyright  2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved.

Published by Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH Tegernseer Landstraße 161 D - 81539 München Germany AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Agfa Company Confidential

HEALTHCARE

Generic Safety Directions

Imaging Services

Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products

►

Purpose of this document This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information for the Service Engineer. It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as Installation Planning document. The latest version is available via MEDNET => GSO Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual

►


1.2

►

04-2007

Release Date

Changes

compared to previous Revision 1.1

04-2007 •

Editorial rework to improve comprehensibility

Referenced Documents Document

Title

n.a.

n.a.

CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled. Document Node ID: 11849633 printed in Germany Enclosure_e_template_v02




WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

INSTRUCTION: Read this document prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the equipment. Strictly observe all safety directions within this document and on the product.



Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 3 Document number: DD+DIS238.06E Agfa Company Confidential


List of Contents

LIST OF CONTENTS

1

DISCLAIMER .........................................................................................................6

2

USED ICONS.........................................................................................................7

3

LABELS..................................................................................................................8 3.1

CE Mark ...................................................................................................8

3.2

System Labels..........................................................................................8

3.3

System Labels concerning Laser Radiation.............................................9

4

PRODUCT COMPLAINTS ...................................................................................10

5

REFERENCES.....................................................................................................10

6

INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11

7

INTENDED USER................................................................................................11

8

QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11

9

CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12

10

ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13

11

COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................14

12

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16

13

RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17

14

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17

15

GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ........................17

16

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18

17

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20

18

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21

19

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23

20

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................23 DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




List of Contents 21

SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24

22

SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24

23

WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24

24

RECYCLING........................................................................................................ 25

25

ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI)................................... 25





Disclaimer

1

Disclaimer The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services. Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting installation or service procedures. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare. Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose. Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this document. Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly. Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.

NOTE: In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to, distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.





Used Icons

2

Used Icons Icon

Name and Circumstances CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the consequence WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients can be the consequence. DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries can be the consequence. INSTRUCTION: If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the subject of the warning or caution. If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally as described. IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to prevent malfunction. NOTE: Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action Highlights unusual points Indicates background information Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user interface. Is additional information without influence on the action or step!





Labels

3

Labels

3.1

CE Mark CE Mark

3.2

This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.

System Labels All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service document in the appropriate section. Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864. This list is not complete.

Hot Surface

Obstacles

Laser Beam

Corrosive Liquid

Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation

High Voltage

Hand Injuries C&W_005.cdr





Labels

3.3

System Labels concerning Laser Radiation According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries. Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4. The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed instructions in the user manual and technical documentation. Class 1:

Not dangerous to the human eye.

Class 2:

Laser units having a maximum output of 1 mW. The accessible laser radiation only lies within the visible range of the spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm). With brief exposure times (up to 0.25 s) there is no danger due to the blink reflex.

Class 3A:

Laser units having a maximum output of 5 mW. The accessible laser radiation becomes dangerous for the eye, if the cross section of radiation is reduced by optical instruments. If this is not the case, the emitted laser radiation in the visible region of the spectrum, with short exposure times (up to 0.25 s), is not dangerous in the spectral regions, even for long irradiation times. Proper use must be observed. Required safety equipment must be used.

Class 3B:

Laser units having a maximum output of 500 mW. Dangerous to the human eye and in particular cases to the skin. Proper use must be observed. Required safety equipment must be used.

Class 4:

Laser units having a higher output than 500 mW. Extremely dangerous to the human eye and dangerous to the human skin. Proper use must be observed. Required safety equipment must be used.

Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V. GIUM Septestraat 27-2640 -Mortsel-BEL 1011 Date: 20 06-07 Type 5175/100 S/N 50-60Hz 100-12 0/220-240V 2.0/1.0A Made in Germany Pe issenberg July 2 006

Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification





Product Complaints - References

4

Product Complaints Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure. If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written correspondence to the following address: Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on: www.agfa.com

Agfa Septestraat 27 2640 Mortsel, Belgium. Fax +32 3 444 7094

5

References Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare support organisation (Paper). Access to MedNet: IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf





Intended Use - Intended Users - Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

6

Intended Use This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological environment by qualified staff. It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards, which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks). AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases. Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate handling, especially by children. The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.

7

Intended User This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.

8

Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be performed by qualified technical personnel. The Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product before attempting to work with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country. Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of law. Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.





Connections to other Equipment

9

Connections to other Equipment Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare service on request. Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the hospital. The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the hospital network using DICOM protocols.

Connections to other equipment: Warning: Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product may lead to a safety hazard.

INSTRUCTION: Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include: • •

Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized national standard.

In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is responsible for complying with the systems standard. If required, contact your local service organization.





Accessories and Spare Parts

10

Accessories and Spare Parts

Parts and accessories replacement: WARNING:

Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.

INSTRUCTION: •

Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.

•

Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.

•

Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com





Compliance

11

Compliance Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products: Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices (OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12) •

ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of users.

•

ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Full quality assurance system ISO 13485

•

ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION The clinical evaluation follows a defined and methodologically sound procedure.

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential performance ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices IEC 60601-1-2 It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.





Compliance

Additional standards for documentation: IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation Harmonization: Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ •

This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user, patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of regulatory systems.

IECEE CB SCHEME The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products. It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations. Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member countries of the CB Scheme. Details see www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency: CAUTION: For USA only: This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference to radio communication.

Note: This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at his own expense.





Safety Directions for Operation

12

Safety Directions for Operation Accessibility of the mains power switch: CAUTION: Do not obstruct the mains power switch. Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power connection. •

•

• • • • •

Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this Technical Documentation. All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be confused with diagnostic t information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic information could be corrupted, Additional investigations must be performed to get clear diagnostic information. Ventilation openings must not be covered. If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from the mains. Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device. If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped. Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields, since stored data may be lost.

Explosive environment: DANGER: Risk of explosion. Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which may cause an explosion. Usage of an un-interruptible power supply: Warning: Images can be lost due to power failure. Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional standby generator.





Radiation Protection - Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection General Safety Directions for Service Activities

13

Radiation Protection

Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories. •

14

Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection •

•

15

Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.

Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service documents. Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

General Safety Directions for Service Activities • • • • • • • • •

This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations. Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician. The safety directions for operation (see section 12) are also valid for all service activities. During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations). All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated torque values! Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8. All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data. If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text. Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232 ,RJ45, USB or other interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).





General Safety Directions for Service Activities Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities

•

When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be observed: o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards. o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers. o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering (electrostatic charge). o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.

Static discharge at electrical components: CAUTION: Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed: For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

16

Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities

Accessibility of the power disconnection device: Warning: Electrical device. Shock possible. INSTRUCTION: •

Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.

•

Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their engineers.





Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities

•

The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology. This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m around the patient.

R = 1.5m 1.5m 1.5m Patient environment

•

This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.

Fixing equipment at the wall or floor: Warning: Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage: Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

Floor load: CAUTION: Heavy device may damage the floor covering. Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.

Fixing equipment at the ceiling: CAUTION: Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or damage: Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.





Safety Directions for Installation Activities

17

Safety Directions for Installation Activities • • •

• • •

If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare trained personnel. If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA representative. Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by mechanical means or by several people. When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is easily accessible. Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely. This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.

Connection of the device to the power supply: CAUTION: Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply: INSTRUCTION: Prior to connecting the device to the mains ... • • • •

Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available power supply in the installation room. Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses. Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply. Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.





Safety Directions for Installation Activities Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

Ground potential differences : CAUTION: To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be connected to the same power source. INSTRUCTION:

18

•

Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as the PC.

•

When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.

Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities • •

• • • •

This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the periods to be applied. In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device immediately after the tests. Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor control board. Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage. After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden or disconnected. If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to the customer. First repair the machine casing. Cleaning optical elements: CAUTION: Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements. When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.





Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

Secured screws: CAUTION: Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device adjustments: Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer. Sharp edges: CAUTION: Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible. Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts. Replacing batteries: WARNING: Battery can explode, causing chemical burns. INSTRUCTION: •

Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

•

Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the manufacturer.

•

Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.

Checking ground connections: WARNING: Improper ground connection of the device metal housing may lead to electric shocks. •

In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective earth resistance according to the national regulations.

•

Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present





Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices

Opening PCs and Workstations: Warning: Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible. • Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual. • Unplug before opening. • Observe anti-static safety regulations.

Replacing fuses: Warning: Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard! Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on the device.

19

Safety Directions for remote Service Activities Remote Service Activities: Warning: During remote service activities images can be lost. Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to stop working on the system.

20

Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices • •

In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) must be shipped with batteries disconnected. Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.





Safety Directions concerning Modifications Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials - Waste Disposal

21

Safety Directions concerning Modifications Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare. This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances, removal of locks/instructions etc.).

22

Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials 'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material” instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with when performing work to avoid health risks. Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the hazardous substances.

23

Waste Disposal The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which entered into force as European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a major change in the treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life. The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in addition, to promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as to reduce the disposal of waste. The WEEE logo on the product or on its box indicates that this product must not be disposed of or dumped with household waste. The owner of the equipment is liable to dispose of all electronic or electrical waste equipment by delivering to the specified collection point for recycling of such hazardous waste, collection and proper recovery of electronic and electrical waste equipment at the time of disposal will allow the producer to help conserve natural resources. Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of human health and the environment. For more information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and collection points, please contact your local, waste disposal service or producer / distributor of this equipment. If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.





Recycling - Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)

24

Recycling Recycling pass see http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf

25

Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI) AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.




Document No: DD+DIS238.06E Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V. All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved.

Published by Agfa HealthCare N.V. Tegernseer Landstraße 161 D - 81539 München Germany AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

printed in Germany Agfa Company Confidential

Chapter 1

HEALTHCARE

Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures

Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document contains:

►

►

•

all important routines to be carried out prior to putting the machine in operation

•

location and function of the controls and connectors of the machine

•

all routines necessary to put an unpacked machine in operation


Release Date

Changes compared to previous version 2.0

2.1

02-2007

•

Updated section “Removing the Shipping Brackets” See section 2.4, pages 7-8.


Title

n.a.

n.a.



Document Node ID: 12401796 eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v02


DD+DIS219.06E




(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

INTENDED USE OF CR 35-X ..................................................................................................4

2

PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ...........................................................................5 2.1

Inspection of Packing................................................................................................................5

2.2

Unpacking the Components......................................................................................................6

2.3

Checking the Scope of Delivery................................................................................................6

2.4

Removing the Shipping Brackets..............................................................................................7

3

OPERATION TERMINAL .......................................................................................................10

4

PREPARATIONS FOR THE INSTALLATION ........................................................................11

5

6

4.1

Preconditions ..........................................................................................................................11

4.2

Required Service Programs....................................................................................................11

4.2.1

CCM-Tool................................................................................................................................11

4.2.2

Error Message Program..........................................................................................................12

4.3

Preparations for the Installation ..............................................................................................12

INSTALLATION OF DIGITIZER .............................................................................................13 5.1

Electric Connection .................................................................................................................13

5.1.1

Connecting the Mains Cable...................................................................................................14

5.2

Start-up ...................................................................................................................................14

5.2.1

Installation without CRUS .......................................................................................................15

5.2.2

Installation with CRUS ............................................................................................................16

5.3

System Integration ..................................................................................................................16

5.4

Make a Backup of machine-specific Data...............................................................................16

CONCLUDING THE INSTALLATION.....................................................................................17 6.1

Checking the Technical Image Quality ...................................................................................17

6.1.1

Exposure of a Flatfield ............................................................................................................17

6.1.2

Evaluation of a Flatfield...........................................................................................................19

6.2

Last Steps ...............................................................................................................................20

7

INSTALLATION OF OTHER CR COMPONENTS..................................................................20

8

CHECKLIST FOR INSTALLATION / MACHINE START-UP..................................................21





DD+DIS219.06E


NOTE: The Installation Checklist in section 8 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps and guides through the complete installation process.

1

Intended Use of CR 35-X The CR 35-X must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an erasable image plate (IP). This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a workstation where the resulting digital image information is further processed and routed. It is intended that the CR 35-X is only operated in a radiological environment by qualified staff.





DD+DIS219.06E


2

Preparations before Installation

2.1

Inspection of Packing The following actions should be taken upon delivery of the system components, preferably by the customer: •

Completeness check of the shipment by means of the packing list (number of pallets)

•

Comparison of the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the shipping papers.

•

Checking of the packing material for visible transport damage such as •

dented edges

•

damage on the box

•

torn fixing elements (metal straps, screws)

•

In case of damage visible from the outside turn to your local AGFA representative.

•

Checking of the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.

figure 1

If the machine was tilted, the arrow head in the circle of the TILTWATCH changes from white to red.

If the machine was subjected to shocks, the square field in the middle of the SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.





DD+DIS219.06E

2.2


Unpacking the Components The following actions must be taken by the forwarder upon delivery of the system components. (1)

Remove the outer packing material. The individual boxes inside must not be opened by the forwarder.

(2)

Take out the accessories or boxes and take out hooks for the ramp.

(3)

Take the machine off the pallet and transport it to the installation site.

(4)

Dispose the packing material.

NOTE: For unpacking and lifting the machine off the pallet, an area of minimal 200 cm x 350 cm is required. If the available space at the installation site is limited, the machine can be unpacked beforehand and rolled to the installation site.

2.3

Checking the Scope of Delivery The following actions have to be done by the FSE (Field Service Engineer) at the customer site. •

Check the scope of delivery: Compare the inventory of every component with the packing list which specifies the complete scope of delivery

Pieces

Description

1

Digitizer

1

Installation Instructions

1

Installation Report

1

User Manual

1

Reference Manual

1

Certificates

2

Mains Cable (1x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)

1

UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)

8

floppy disks (3 x Release floppy, 1 x Hard Disk Formatter floppy, 1 x Language floppy, 1 x Backup floppy, 2 x Portex floppy)

1

Handle

1

Cu filter





DD+DIS219.06E

2.4


Removing the Shipping Brackets Remove all cushioning parts and transport safeguards prior to first operation as described below in steps 1 – 11.

figure 2

CAUTION: Transportation parts can damage the product. Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation. (1)

Remove two cable ties and swing metal safeguard forward and remove it.

(2)

Remove cable tie.

(3)

Remove two cable ties and lift the foam strip and remove it.

(4)

Remove two cable ties and lift the foam strip and remove it.

(5)

Swing the foam block aside and remove it.

(6)

Lift and remove the two foam blocks.

(7)

Remove cable tie and turn the metal bar upwards approx. 45° and pull it out.

(8)

Swing out the cPCI-rack and remove the foam part.

NOTE: The foam part is hidden behind the cPCI-rack and can not be seen from outside! DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

(9)


Remove the L-shaped transport safeguard.

(10) Install the handle (which is in scope of delivery) instead. (11) Remove three cable ties at the Photomultiplier. (2 cable ties on the left side and 1 cable tie on the right side)

figure 3





DD+DIS219.06E


Controls and Connections

4 3 2 1 5

6 8 7

5158_reg01_003.cdr

VDE UL figure 4

(1)

Line switch Digitizer

(2)

Port (RS 232 – 25-pin D connector, female D) for the Service PC (behind the front door)

(3)

Status indicator

(4)

Emergency buttons

(5)

Network connection (unshielded twisted pair)

(6)

Voltage adaptation switch

(7)

Mains cable VDE/UL

(8)

Supplementary grounding cable connection and Potential Equalization





DD+DIS219.06E

3


Operation Terminal

5155_reg01_002.cdr

figure 5

Display Functions The key operator level is intended to be used by the normal operator. He uses the system only to produce diagnostic usable images without the requirement for special technical skill or background.

Key

Function

Key

Function

•

Gives an image the status of emergency when sending it to the processing station

•

Starts erasing images without scanning them

•

Provides access to advanced key-operator functions

• •

Gives access to service level functions Exits the service level

Quits the current function, exits a menu without saving modifications

•

Confirms the keyboarded input

•

•

Exits from key-operator mode and service level

•

Confirms that you have noticed non-fatal errors In "LOCKED" condition, proceeds with the Digitizer operation

•

Moves the cursor one position up to previous edit field

•

Moves the cursor one position down to next edit field

•

Scrolls upwards or increments digits in a numeric entry field

•

Scrolls downwards or decrements digits in a numeric entry field

•

Scrolls backwards through multiple choices within a field Moves the entry position in a numerical field in descending order (from right digit to left digit) or toggles between values

•

Scrolls backwards through multiple choices within a field Moves the entry position in a numerical field in ascending order (from left digit to right digit) or toggles between values

•

•

•





DD+DIS219.06E


4

Preparations for the Installation

4.1

Preconditions •

the digitizer is at its installation site

•

finished pre-installation as described in 4.3

NOTE: When integrating the digitizer into an existing network, it is necessary to create a CPF– file beforehand (see Chapter 11, Installation Planning, checklist). With a pure CR Network (1 Digitizer, 1 Image Processing Station, 1 Preview/ID Station), the shipment configuration can be used.

4.2

Required Service Programs The following Software has to be installed on:

4.2.1

•

your Service PC or

•

the PC of the ID / Preview -Station.

CCM-Tool The latest version of the CCM - Tool can be downloaded from MedNet. The CCM - Tool is needed to create and modify the configuration file (adc.cpf) for the CR 35-X and the other CR System Components. IMPORTANT: Possibility of incorrect software performance. If there is already a previous version installed on your Service PC, remove the complete directory as well as the icons. Installation: •

install by executing "setup.exe"

The CCM Tool will be installed in directory "IMOS" or any directory of your choice.





DD+DIS219.06E

4.2.2


Error Message Program The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" with the "ERROR.MSG file" translates the CR 35-X error codes into clear text. The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" is a part of IMOS, the "ERROR.MSG file" is loaded in the Digitizer.

4.3

Preparations for the Installation The following work should be performed before the system components are installed: •

Laying of the network cables (Ethernet).

•

Creation and adaptation of the configuration file adc.cpf, together with the application specialist.

NOTE: We recommend, creating and adapting the configuration file adc.cpf, before starting the installation. This allows you a smooth installation. For detailed information see CR System Components, DD+DIS198.00E, chapter 6.2.





DD+DIS219.06E


5

Installation of Digitizer

5.1

Electric Connection CAUTION: Risk of damaging the digitizer by wrong voltage selection. Prior to first operation check voltage selector at rear side of digitizer. If the voltage adaption is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch to correct position.

Voltage selector

11_ _reg 5155

Voltage can be adapted to 100 / 120 / 230-240 V.

dr 007 .c

1

The default setting is 230-240 V

figure 6

NOTE: If the CR 35-X shall operate at 240 V / 60 Hz use a phase to phase centre tap wall outlet, otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.





DD+DIS219.06E

5.1.1


Connecting the Mains Cable Two mains cables are included as standard delivery: •

USA/Japan: Nema 5-15P; (UL)

•

Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A; (VDE)

Mains connection Remove the yellow sticker from the mains socket of the machine only after having checked the voltage adjustment.

(2)

Connect the correct mains cable to the machine and to the power supply.

CHECK POWER SELECTION BEFORE CONNECTING TO MAINS 5155_reg01_004.cdr

(1)

figure 7

5.2

Start-up NOTE: The Digitizer must not be connected to a network during the start-up process. (1)

Switch on the digitizer.

(2)

Check the operation terminal during the initialization. While booting for the first time, the message "Installation not yet confirmed" appears. Confirm with .

(3)

After a successful start-up "ready" appears.

(4)

Check/adjust date and time in key operator mode.

(5)

Choose terminal language in the service menu "Configure – User terminal language", available after release of Language File.

(6)

Store the modified machine-specific data.

(7)

Open the service menu "Maintenance – test cycle without scan" and check the function of cassette- and plate operation with the machine open. Each size should run at least one time.

(8)

Erase all image plates.

End of the mechanical part of start-up. Proceed with 5.2.1 or 5.2.1.2





DD+DIS219.06E


5.2.1

Installation without CRUS

5.2.1.1

Integrating the Digitizer into an independent, pure CR Network A pure CR network consists of: •

1 digitizer

•

processing station

In this case the ex factory settings for the IP-address (adcs1 192.9.200.199) can be used. A new configuration of the machine is not required. Measures: (1)

Switch off the digitizer

(2)

Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet

(3)

Switch on the digitizer

End of network integration. Proceed with 5.3.

5.2.1.2

Integrating the Digitizer into an existing Network In this case the IP-address has to be adapted to the existing network. This happens by means of the CPF-file created beforehand. Measures: (1)

Load the adapted configuration file ”adc.cpf” (see 4.2.1): - insert the disk with the CPF-File - select

(2)

Choose a name suggested on the LCD

(3)

Store the modified machine-specific data

(4)


(5)

Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet

(6)


The digitizer is now integrated to the network





DD+DIS219.06E

5.2.2


Installation with CRUS The CRUS already includes UPS, HUB, isolating transformer and processing station with monitor, keyboard and mouse. It works together with a digitizer as a pure CR network. Measures:

5.3

(1)


(2)

Connect all components

(3)


System Integration Precondition The destinations intended for the digitizer, have to be put into operation and must be obtainable via Ethernet. Measures: (1)

Check whether the processing station is obtainable. Service menu: "Checks – Check destinations"

(2)

Send a test image to the processing station Key operator menu “Send test image”

(3)

Check the function of the emergency buttons. As a precondition the emergency buttons must have been programmed via CPF. Standard CPF includes entries about the emergency buttons. If a new CPF has been created, corresponding entries have to be present.

End of system integration

5.4

Make a Backup of machine-specific Data (1)

Insert an existing backup floppy or a new formatted floppy

(2)

Start the service program

(3) Select (4)

Start the backup procedure

(5)

Label the floppy as shown in figure 8.

figure 8





DD+DIS219.06E


6

Concluding the Installation

6.1

Checking the Technical Image Quality The hard disk of the digitizer contains two flatfields showing the least acceptable quality. For quality evaluation flatfields can be sent to a printer via Service-Menu Compare the samples with the images created by yourself.

6.1.1

Exposure of a Flatfield (1)

Expose a gray field (flatfield) and evaluate the image on the Processing Station and the Laser printer. Criteria: homogenous field, stripes etc.

(2)

Have a new plate of every format exposed twice as follows:

Rotating Anode

x-ray tube Cathode

5155_reg01_006.cdr

figure 9

(3)

For exposure place the cassette to match the long axes of cassette and x-ray tube; see figure 9. 1st exposure: Dose: 10 µGy 12.0 mAs – 75 kV – 1.3 m distance, 1.5 mm Cu filter

NOTE: Please note that these are approximate values that may vary within the x-ray devices to reach the specified dose of 10 µGy.





DD+DIS219.06E


(4)

Turn cassette by 180°.

(5)

2nd exposure: use same parameters as in 1st exposure.

(6)

Use a dosimeter to measure the dose!

(7)

Identify the cassette as follows:

On QS Processing Station: • Select Study type: . • Select Substudy: . • Confirm Exposure class: <200>.

figure 10

On NX Processing Station: • Select Exam Group: . • Select Exposure Type: . • Confirm Detector Sensitivity: <400>.

figure 11

(8)

Insert the cassette into the Digitizer. Print the image on a printer with a window setting of 0.6 without changing the level setting on the processing station.





DD+DIS219.06E

6.1.2


Evaluation of a Flatfield Banding Fine white or gray lines in fast-scan direction Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on banding pattern If quality is less than “banding pattern test image”: Contact Support center

NOTE: Fine white or gray lines can also appear, if there is dust on the scanner (in slowscan direction) - use the scan-brush for cleaning the scanner.

Calibration / Shading Calibration

Dark lines or stripes in slow scan direction Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on sample If quality is less than “calibration pattern test image”: Check / adjust the position of the laser beam via the fiber optics Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration pattern. If quality is still less than calibration pattern: Make new calibration; Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration pattern. If quality is still less than calibration pattern: Contact Support center





DD+DIS219.06E

6.2


Last Steps (1)

Dispose of all packing material. (Depending on the country, by the forwarding agent or by the hospital).

(2)

Complete the Installation Report (enclosed to every device) for all system components and forward it to the regional RSN Manager.

(3)

Fill in the enclosed form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE GSO, if not done yet.

(4)

Fill in the site entry form (available on MedNet) for entering the data in SRSS and forward it to your national data coordinator.

(5)

Hand over the CR System to the application specialist.

NOTE: Now the technical part of the installation is finished and the application part begins. Activities beyond the Checklist for Installation/Machine-Start-up must not be booked on Task Code INS.

7

Installation of other CR Components NOTE: For detailed information on the installation of the processing station / client station or IDStation, see: ADC Quality System 2.1.xx

DD+DIS135.02E, Chapter 1

CR Quality System 3.0

DD+DIS273.04E

CR Quality System 3.5

DD+DIS302.05E

ADC System Components

DD+DIS198.00E, Chapter 3.

NX 1.0

DD+DIS396.06E





DD+DIS219.06E

8


Checklist for Installation / Machine Start-up No. Step

Task Code

OK

Before Installation (1)

Confirm installation prerequisites

INS

(2)

Check consignment of all devices for damage and completeness

INS

Installation and Start-up CRUS + Processing Station (3)

Unpack, check consignment for damage and completeness

(4)

Connect power cords, monitor, keyboard, mouse, and optional INS devices (image disks, UPS, DAT-Drive)

(5)

Position processing station respectively CRUS.

INS

(6)

Set in operating system (OS): network settings

INS

(7)

Set in OS: regional settings

INS

(8)

Set in OS: time and data

INS

(9)

For processing station: Set network settings in OS / settings / control panel

INS

(10) For processing station: QS: Open Configuration Viewer / File / Import XML NX: Start NX Configurator / Load a configuration from an external media

INS

INS

(11) Check basic functions like receiving, printing, sending, viewing INS images (12) Create a site specific backup

INS

(13) Check initialization of all cassettes; if required reinitialize them INS Digitizer Installation and Start-up (14) Remove shipping brackets and install base plate

INS

(15) Connect the power cord

INS

(16) When first booting: Confirm installation with OK

INS

(17) Check date and time in key operator mode

INS

(18) Choose terminal language in service menu

INS

(19) Reset Infocounters (20) Make a backup of the machine-specific data

INS INS





DD+DIS219.06E


No. Step

Task Code

(21) Check the mechanic components Perform a "Handling Cycle" to check the function of image plates and cassettes

INS

(22) Erase all image plates

INS

(23) Network Integration load the adapted configuration file adc.cpf select a station name for the digitizer from the display make a backup of the machine specific data connect the digitizer to the Ethernet

INS

(24) System Integration - check whether the processing station is obtainable: ; - send a test image to processing station: "Send test image" in key operator menu

INS

(25) Check the image quality send flatfield to a printer:

OK

INS

expose flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED) print flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED), compare and evaluate the printouts (26) Check "Fast Preview" and “Direct ID” option, if activated

CR – Entire System (27) Perform system test with medical images

INS

(28) Hand over the CR system to the field application specialist

INS

(29) Fill in the form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE GSO INS (30) Send the completed "Installation Reports" to the regional Service Manager of your cluster.

INS

Remote Access (31) Make connection to Service Host

INS





HEALTHCARE

Chapter 2


Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual assemblies always under normal conditions without any problems (nominal functional sequence). Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin

CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) introduced, DD+DIS407.06E



Document Node ID: 12401803 eq_02_functional_e_template_v02


DD+DIS219.06E




(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

2

3

DIGITIZER AS A PART OF THE CR SYSTEM ........................................................................6 1.1

CR System Components ..........................................................................................................6

1.2

Standard Workflow of a CR System .........................................................................................9

1.3

Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the CR System ............................................10

1.4

Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview............................................................................12

IMAGE PLATES .....................................................................................................................12 2.1

ADC MD 30 Image Plate Principle..........................................................................................12

2.2

CR MD 40 General Plate ........................................................................................................13

2.3

CR MM 3.0 Image Plate – special Treatments .......................................................................14

CASSETTES ..........................................................................................................................15 3.1

CR MD 4.0 General Cassette .................................................................................................15

3.2

CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette....................................................................16

3.3

Asymmetric Cassette ..............................................................................................................17

3.4

CR Mammography Cassette...................................................................................................18

3.5

CR MD 4.2 Extremities Cassette ............................................................................................19

3.6

Modular Structure of the Digitizer ...........................................................................................22

3.7

Overview of Modules ..............................................................................................................22

3.8

Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................23

3.9

Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................24

3.10

Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................25

3.10.1

Laser Diode.............................................................................................................................27

3.10.2

Polygon Mirror.........................................................................................................................27

3.10.3

Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module ...............................................................28

3.10.4

Optic Module Housing.............................................................................................................28

3.11

Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................29

3.12

cPCI-Rack ...............................................................................................................................30

3.12.1

CPU-OBERON........................................................................................................................31

3.12.2

Scan Master Board .................................................................................................................32

3.12.3

cPCI Power Supply .................................................................................................................33 DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

4

5


3.12.4

Hard Disk ................................................................................................................................34

3.13

Power Unit...............................................................................................................................35

3.13.1

Power Integration Board .........................................................................................................36

CYCLE OF A CASSETTE IN THE DIGITIZER.......................................................................37 4.1

Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................37

4.1.1

Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette .....................................................................37

4.1.2

Identification of the Cassette...................................................................................................37

4.1.3

Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID Data .............................................38

4.1.4

Opening the Cassette .............................................................................................................38

4.2

Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................39

4.2.1

Sucking the IP .........................................................................................................................39

4.2.2

Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit .......................................39

4.3

Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................40

4.3.1

Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit...................................................................................40

4.3.2

Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path)......................................................................41

4.4

Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................41

4.4.1

Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit ...................................................41

4.5

Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................42

4.5.1

Putting IP back into Cassette..................................................................................................42

4.5.2

Putting Cassette out of Digitizer..............................................................................................43

SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ..............................................................................................44 5.1

Available Software ..................................................................................................................44

5.2

Web Pages..............................................................................................................................44

5.3

Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part ..........................................................................44





DD+DIS219.06E

6

7


SIGNAL AND DATA FLOW ....................................................................................................45 6.1

Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................45

6.2

Data Flow ................................................................................................................................46

6.3

FLD Directories.......................................................................................................47

CALIBRATION PRINCIPLE....................................................................................................48 7.1

IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment) ........................................................................48

7.1.1

BOL Sensor.............................................................................................................................48

7.1.2

BOS Sensor ............................................................................................................................48

7.1.3

Calibration Procedure .............................................................................................................48

7.2

Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................49





DD+DIS219.06E


1

Digitizer as a Part of the CR System

1.1

CR System Components ADC Cassette with image plate inside The ADC cassette is the “container” for the image plate. During the handling outside the Digitizer (e.g. exposing the plate) the image plate is in the cassette. It is only opened inside the Digitizer. The ADC cassette has an internal chip card which holds the cassette, patient, examination and routing data belonging to a certain X-ray exposure. The data put together are called demographic data. The image plate takes the place of the X-ray film in a conventional system. It receives the X-Ray radiation and “stores” a latent image. The image plates can be reused thousands of times. The actual restriction of utilization is the mechanical robustness.

Identification Tablet – CRUS (CR User Station) The Identification Tablet is used to write the cassette, patient, examination and routing data to the cassette chip. This data can be entered manually or by retrieving the data from a Hospital or Radiology Information System (HIS/RIS). Writing and reading is done by means of radio frequency in a contact less manner. The Identification software is an AGFA product and implemented in the processing station software.





DD+DIS219.06E


DICOM Digitizers (CR 85-X / CR 75.0 / ADC Compact / CR 35-X / CR 25.0 / ADC Solo) The Digitizer is used to read the latent image in the image plate. After the ADC cassette is exposed and identified it is inserted into the Digitizer. The Digitizer reads the data on the cassette chip, opens the cassette, takes out the image plate and scans it. The latent image on the image plate is stimulated by means of a laser beam to emit light according to X-ray exposure. The data from the cassette chip is used to set the scan parameters correctly (e.g. speed class, image plate size, etc.) for this individual X-ray exposure. The emitted light is converted into voltage and then digitalized into a 12/14bit, square root compressed raw image. This image is transmitted together with the chip data on the fly via Ethernet to the Processing Station. A backup of that image is made on the internal hard disk in parallel to retransmit the image in case of transmission problems. The output format of the Digitizer is DICOM SCU-CR. After scanning / transmitting is finished the image plate is erased with very bright light to make it ready for the next exposure. It is put back into the cassette and a status flag on the cassette chip is set from “EXPOSED” to “ERASED”. The cassette is returned to the user and is ready for the next examination. CR QS Server Station The CR QS (Quality System) Server Station is a Windows XPbased Workstation with the CR Quality-System software installed. The CR QS Server Station receives the raw image from the Digitizer. Every incoming image runs through an image processing. The processed images are stored on the internal hard disk(s) of the Server station. However, the QS Server station only provides short term storage. The final archiving must be realized either by hardcopies or a PACS. Further on, the QS Server station decodes the routing data and sends the image data to the selected destinations (e.g. Printer, PACS) A Softcopy can be sent to an Archive with 8 or 12 bit. To print a Hardcopy a 8 bit format is used. For the QS Server station a lot of licensed software options (e.g. Annotation, Print Composer, etc.) exist.





DD+DIS219.06E


CR QS Client Station The CR QS (Quality System) Client Station allows identification and basic viewing.

NX Processing Station NX is the successor of the CR QS systems. NX shows the following features: •

Identify examinations using RIS-based worklists.

•

Perform multiple exams at the same time.

•

Perform emergency exams, without selecting RIS data for identification.

•

Select exposures fro an exam.

•

Edit patient data.

NX does not support client stations. The NX system can either be installed in or outside an X-ray room, in mobile environments. It can also be operated in an secure environment using authentication and certificates.





DD+DIS219.06E

1.2


Standard Workflow of a CR System

X-Ray device

ID-Tablet - CRUS ADC Cassette with image plate inside ID-Data

Digitizer

ID- and Image Data ADC QS Server/Client Station

Archive Station

Printer

5158_reg02_007.cdr

figure 1





DD+DIS219.06E

1.3


Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the CR System

X-Ray device

ADC Cassette with image plate inside

Digitizer

ID-Data

ID-Station

5155_reg02_002.cdr

figure 2

Dedicated configuration offers a time saving workflow (approximately one minute for a two cassettes study). If only one ID Station is dedicated to one CR 35-X, cassettes can be identified without using an ID-Tablet. This option is called Direct ID. The demographic data are transmitted from the ID viewer to the digitizer via the network. This data flow makes it possible to scan an IP and to simultaneously enter the ID data.





DD+DIS219.06E


•

A speed class is selected on the CR 35-X by use of the emergency buttons. The sensitivity associated with the emergency buttons has been set during the configuration of the system.

•

An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.

•

By entering the cassette, the digitizer reads the remaining cassette information of the RF Tag and a communication channel to its dedicated ID Station is opened.

•

The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request message to the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID Station and the ID data have to be entered.

•

After the user completed the information at the ID Station, it is sent back to the digitizer. The communication channel is closed afterwards.

•

The transmission of the scanned image to the Processing Station and the Fast Preview image data is sent to the PRID-Station.

•

Before the cassette is put out, the ID data on the RF Tag is erased and the cycle counter is increased by the digitizer.

NOTE: Dealing with an emergency cassette the identification can be left out at all. Therefore, the user enforces the complete processing of the IP by pressing the Confirm Key at the digitizer. The digitizer emits an ID Cancel command to the ID Station, where the ID screen drops and the communication channel is closed. The digitizer completes its emergency cycle and increases the cycle counter of the cassette.





DD+DIS219.06E

1.4


Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview The features Direct ID and Fast Preview can also work in combination:

2

•

A speed class, by use of the emergency buttons, is selected on the digitizer.

•

An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.

•

The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request message to the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID Station and the ID data will be entered.

•

While the user is entering the data, the Fast Preview screen of the PRID is not visible. The transmission of the reduced Fast Preview image will be postponed until the ID data is completely inserted.

•

The digitizer sends the image to the Processing Station and parallel the reduced Fast Preview image to the PRID. As soon as the calculation of the image is finished, the Processing Station sends the preview image to the PRID and replaces the Fast Preview.

Image Plates The CR plate can be identified by the plate type and sensitivity code printed on the back.

2.1

ADC MD 30 Image Plate Principle The image plate lying in the cassette consists of five different layers: Legend figure 3:

Image Plate Structure

Protective EBC (electron-beam-cured) top coat

2

Phosphor layer

3

Anti-halo layer, blue

4

Support P.E.T, white

5

Laminate

1 2 3

5146_reg02_003.CDR

1

4 5

figure 3

The phosphor layer is “storing” the picture information as energy. The EBC top coat provides a smooth surface of the image plate to reach a good signalto-noise ratio. Combination of white support layer and blue anti-halo layer increases the sensitivity. The anti-halo layer lets through the stimulated light but blocks laser light. The laminate is needed as base material. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

2.2


CR MD 40 General Plate CR MD40 Plates are initialized with code 15. The fourth-generation imaging plate is composed of the following six layers:

figure 4

Improved phosphor layer The storage phosphors used in the phosphor layer provide high absorption efficiency and excellent homogeneity, while their short response time ensures the fading of the previous pixel before stimulating the next one. A high level of sharpness at all spatial frequencies is thus secured. Since the phosphor layer has been improved, the ADC MD40 imaging plates ensure increased image quality for lower doses, such as the 400 speed class. Additional adhesion layer Another new feature of the ADC MD40 imaging plate is the introduction of an additional adhesion layer. This gives the ADC MD40 imaging plate better mechanical stability than its forerunners, and prevents peeling at the corners. EBC top-coating technology Agfa's long experience and extensive research into plate abrasion resistance has led to a dramatic improvement in EBC top-coating technology. This improved technology has been used for the ADC MD30 as well as for the ADC MD40.





DD+DIS219.06E


White support layer and anti-halo layer The use of a white support layer in combination with an anti-halo layer gives high sensitivity. The anti-halo layer is an Agfa-patented blue layer that forms a perfect barrier against laser light, but lets through the stimulated light. Downward compatibility Each ADC MD40 imaging plate is identified by a code on the back. The ADC MD40, ADC MD30 and ADC MD10 plates can be used together without any problem.

2.3

CR MM 3.0 Image Plate – special Treatments CAUTION: Wrong screen cleaner may damage the Image plate. Do not use the AGFA CR phosphor plate cleaner to clean the CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates. Use PROSAT wipers instead.

•

CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates require dedicated wipers.

•

These wipers can only be used once, but different CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates can be cleaned one after the other with one wiper.

•

Storage of the PROSAT wipers: carefully close the bag of wipers and keep in a cool place (< 25 °C).

•

When cleaning CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates, leave the plate surface to dry for about one (1) minute before putting the plate back into the casette.





DD+DIS219.06E

3


Cassettes The principle function of the digitizer is close connected to the structure of the CR Cassettes. The digitizer accepts only CR Cassettes. All other cassettes, e.g. ADC 70, are refused.

3.1

CR MD 4.0 General Cassette NOTE: The cassette must always be inserted into the digitizer in the correct orientation to make it possible to identify and handle the cassette!

1

Legend figure 5: (1)

ADC label

(2)

ID-Chip carries demographic data

(3)

Label showing size of Image Plate

(4)

Sliders to prevent from usage in film handling devices

(5)

Metal label – silver dot – identifies an ADC Cassette

(6)

ADC Image Plate (gray surface up, white surface down)

2

3

4 5

6 4

figure 5

The ADC label and the label, showing the size of the contained image plate, are put on for the identification by the user. The metal label is detected by the digitizer to identify the cassette as an ADC cassette. The demographic data is at the ID-Station transferred by no-touch radio frequency tagging to the ID-Chip and is read out in the digitizer. The data is in that way always linked to the image. For protection against electrostatic charging and mechanical damage the inner lining of the cassette is made of felt.





DD+DIS219.06E

3.2


CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette Specification To improve the image quality with Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) images a FLFS CR Cassette was introduced. Identification

The FLFS CR Cassettes are with exception of two major differences identical to the current standard ADC Cassette (35 cm x 43 cm). The differences are: •

Reduced backscatter protection (minus 1.5 cm at locking and hinge side)

•

Specific FLFS labeling

figure 6

Further points of identification •

All labels are yellow, which is unique for FLFS

•

Labeling “FLFS” to identify cassette as type FLFS

•

Yellow dots to recognize cassette as FLFS also in buffer or stack I

Format The FLFS Cassette is available in format 35 cm x 43 cm.





DD+DIS219.06E

3.3


Asymmetric Cassette Specification The Asymmetric Cassette is dedicated for X-ray exposures where no centered positioning of the part of the body is possible (e.g. side view of a spinal column).

Identification A cassette for asymmetric scanning can be identified by a red hatching covering less than the half of the cassette side. (see beside) 5146_reg02_004.cdr

figure 7

Formats The ADC Asymmetric Cassette is available in: •

21 cm x 43 cm (asymmetric partial scan of dedicated 35 cm x 43 cm cassettes)





DD+DIS219.06E

3.4


CR Mammography Cassette Specification The CR Mammo Cassette is a dedicated cassette for use in combination with CR Mammo Plates 2.00 for dedicated mammography applications. It features a narrow hinge to allow scanning right up to the chest wall. A distinctive feature of the CR Mammo Cassette, in comparison with general ADC cassettes, is the narrower hinge. This means that there is a closer contact with the skinline, offering an increased amount of information during scanning. The CR Mammo Cassette contains a CR Mammo image plate. This type of image plate has a special phosphor layer which results in reduced noise and increased sharpness. The cassette is equipped with a positioning mechanism in order to ensure the chest wall distance to the image plate. Identification The cassette is labeled with “Mammo” on both sides. The cassette is pre-initialized as a Mammo Cassette, but if the identification is lost, it can be given via the ID Station.

1

2

figure 8

1

positioning mechanism for IP (2 x, left and right cassette side)

2

passive suction cup, keeping the IP in place inside the cassette





DD+DIS219.06E


Formats: The CR Mammo Cassette is available in two formats:

3.5

•

18 cm x 24 cm

•

24 cm x 30 cm

CR MD 4.2 Extremities Cassette Specification The CR MD4.2 Extremities system is foreseen for X-ray images of the distal extremities and adjacent joints (hands and feet) and provides a spatial scan resolution of 50 µm. Initialization: •

Scan size: 18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm

•

Scan resolution: Very high resolution

The CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can only work when digitizer software C25_2007 or higher is installed on the CR 35-X.

WARNING: Poor image quality caused by incorrect cassette initialization. Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the corresponding user manual.

Identification CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can be recognized by the code label “Extremities - code XX” The light green dots are dedicated only to the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette. This makes it easy to distinguish the cassette from others when stored in a rack.





DD+DIS219.06E


CAUTION: Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes: Only cassettes with both labels “CR MD4.2 Extremities” and “Extremities code XX” must be used for the Extremities application (XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL). Other cassettes must not be used.

a b

CR MD4.2 Extremities

2 green dots on side

2 green dots

5156_dis307.05_001.cdr

1 silver dot 1 green dot

Extremities - code XX

Cassette formats 18 x 24 cm or 24 x 30 cm

figure 9: Labeling of the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette

Formats New CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes (available formats 18 x 24 cm and 24 x 30 cm) are delivered with the appropriate initialization: •

Scan size:

•

Scan resolution: Very high resolution

18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm





DD+DIS219.06E


System Preparation •

Ensure the correct digitizer software has been installed: see Software Requirements. You can check this via the digitizer display.

•

Ensure the additional shading calibration for Extremities (75 kV, 2 x 10 µGy, Cu filter 1.5 mm as for GenRad) has been performed with a GenRad cassette 35 x 43 cm (in the same digitizer sub-menu as for the other shading calibrations)

•

Installation of the Extremities-testimage on the digitizer in E:/extremity The test image is an Extremity image of a hand with wrist. The image (30 MB) will be provided first via Service MedNet, GSO Library: Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 25.0 / Freeware/ CR 25.0 - Software - Extremities Test Image Later on it will additionally be available on a new CR test images CD. Further information will be distributed.

CR QS software version 3.0.207 or higher must be installed(check via the Help menu of the CR QS software) Using the Extremities System Radiographer •

Cassette should be erased before first usage after delivery

•

Same handling as for normal GenRad cassettes in respect of: o

X-ray exposure technique

o

Identification of cassette

o

Workflow

o

Erasure

o

According to good radiographer practice - lead markers indicating Left/Right should be applied

o

Cassettes have to be erased if they were not used for 1 - 2 days (e.g. over weekend)

o

Cleaning of image plate with ADC - Screen cleaner, frequency as for GenRad cassettes or on demand

•

Digitizers which do not fulfill the requirements will reject the Extremities cassette

•

Dose indicator (lgm value) can be 0.15 points lower than on the same image done on a GenRad cassette. This is because the phosphor layer of the image plate is a bit thinner.

Radiologist •

Improved sharpness of the trabecular structure of the bone because of 50 µm pixel size. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E


3.6

Modular Structure of the Digitizer

3.7

Overview of Modules

100

700 600 500 400

300

200 51 5

6_ re g 02 _0 01

.cd r

100 Frame 200 Power Unit 300 cPCI Rack 400 Scan Unit 500 Erasure Unit 600 IP Transport Unit 700 Cassette Unit figure 10 DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

3.8


Cassette Unit

6

7

5

4 3 2 1

figure 11

(1)

Cassette roller

(2)

Clamp unit

(3)

Cassette lift

(4)

Cassette position detection light barrier

(5)

Cassette opener 0-position light barrier

(6)

RF – tag reader

(7)

Finger to block Input/Output (I/O) slot

The cassette unit loads the cassette from the I/O slot, fixes and holds the cassette during the IP is taken out and scanned. The RF-tag reader and the antenna read out the ID- and image specific data. After processing the IP cassette status is changed from “Identified” to “Erased”. Cassette unit transports the cassette back to I/O slot for output. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

3.9


Transport Unit

1

2

figure 12

(1)

Vacuum pump

(2)

Suction cups

Within the transport unit the IP is taken out of the cassette and lead to the scan unit. After scanning, the IP is erased while it is moved upwards. The IP is put back to the cassette in the cassette unit.





DD+DIS219.06E

3.10


Scan Unit

1

2

3

figure 13

(1)

Optic module

(2)

Stepper motor boards

(3)

Slow scan motor





DD+DIS219.06E


5

6

4

5158_re

g02_00 1.cdr

figure 14

(1)

Photomultiplier module

(2)

Optic module

(3)

Light collector

The function of the scan module is to stimulate a two dimensional, X-ray exposed phosphor image plate with laser energy. Out of the blue light, which is emitted by the phosphor, a digital image is generated. The stimulation of the image plate is done pixel by pixel. Therefore the laser beam is moved. The laser power on the focal plane is 50 mW + 5 %. The movement in the xaxis is achieved by a rotating polygon mirror (fast scan direction) which is part of the optical path. The movement in the y-axis is done mechanically by transporting the image plate (slow scan direction) with two pairs of rolls.





DD+DIS219.06E


The Scan mode 2 µs is used for 35 cm x 43 cm high resolution scanning. A 1 µs scan mode has been established already in ADC Compact Plus for 35 x 43 cm cassettes standard resolution. This principle has been enhanced in CR 85-X /CR 35-X to small formats < 35 x 43 cm. Consequently, the throughput increases because of reduced scan time. The 1 µs scan mode option can be switched on in the key operator menu.

3.10.1

Laser Diode The optic module contains a monochromatic anamorph scan optic where the laser beam is modified. The light source which is stimulating the image plate is one red laser diode, with a wavelength from 650 nm to 670 nm and a maximal output of 50 mW each (see 2 in figure below). The increase and decrease time of the laser power is shorter than 20 µs. The beam of the laser diode is focused to have a spot diameter of 60 µm on the scan surface.

1 3 2

Fa s

4 51 48 _c ha p2 _0 02 .cd r

ts

ca

nd

ire c

tio

n

figure 15

3.10.2

Polygon Mirror The Polygon mirror has 6 facets, each with a mirror (see 1 in figure 11). It is turned by a DC motor which is clock pulsed from the scanning hardware. Pixel times between 2.5 and 0.6 µs can be reached, but for scanning are two times used, 1 and 2 µs.





DD+DIS219.06E

3.10.3


Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module

5148_02_007.cdr

figure 16

The detector module consists of an acrylic light collection module, an optical filter and a photomultiplier module (PMM). The acrylic light collection module, the optical filter and the PMM are cemented together in order to obtain the maximum available light collection efficiency. The acrylic light collection unit consists of an acrylic light guide, a collection mirror and a mechanical mount supporting simple exchange of the detector module. The aim of this development is to provide high image quality for EUREF compliance with a detector that can be integrated in a digitizer with maximum similarity to the CR 75.0 digitizer. The image quality is increased by improved light collection efficiency with an acrylic light guide.

3.10.4

Optic Module Housing The housing is made of cast aluminum witch is electrical isolated to the ground plate. The cover is made of conductive material to achieve electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The housing of the optic module stays closed in the field and no service needs to be done inside.





DD+DIS219.06E

3.11


Erasure Unit

1

3

2

4

figure 17

(1)

Halogen lamps, 100 Watt

(2)

Erasure unit fan (part of the frame)

(3)

KG2 filter for heat protection

(4)

Front glass (UV filter with sensitive gelatin layer)

The lamps are controlled by the erasure control board. They are controlled during work in pairs and also the power supply of 12 V is generated via 5 single transformer. For erasing the image plate a power input of in total 1000 Watt with 230 V / 50 Hz is present. The erasure unit fan (placed in the Frame) is switched on during erasing the image plate for cooling down the unit. The speed the IP is transported past the erasure unit depends on speed class and format (Erasure energy per time is determined by means of the demographic data).





DD+DIS219.06E

3.12


cPCI-Rack

1

7 6

5 4

3

2

figure 18

1 cPCI Rack Fan 2 cPCI Power Supply 3 CPU Oberon

4 5 6 7

Scan Master Board Backplane Hard disk Floppy drive

The cPCI-Rack (compact Peripheral Component Interconnect) consists of the processing unit CPU, the Scan Master Board, the Power Supply of the cPCI-Rack, a floppy drive and a hard disk. On top of the rack the fan for cooling the cPCI-Rack is mounted and on the back the backplane with all the connectors is placed. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

3.12.1


CPU-OBERON The CPU (Central Processing Unit) is a Power PC and is working with an operating system called Oberon. The interfaces to the service and the Ethernet are placed on the front plane.

Service: Serial debug port connector, SuperIO and DUART

Connector (female) to Service Interface (RS232)

Fast Ethernet Controller: RJ45 connector, Fast Ethernet with 10 to 100 Mbit/s

Connector to Fast Ethernet

LED (FPGA NOT Conf. Green, TRAFFIC yellow, Ethernet LINK red) Hardware control

Software controllable with Portex tool 3 2

LED (3 green, 2 yellow, 1 red) Software control

Hardware related signaling: Ethernet Traffic – yellow LED Ethernet linked – red LED FPGA not configured – green LED

Halt Switch

HALT: Abort action

Reset Switch

RESET: Global reset

figure 19





DD+DIS219.06E

3.12.2


Scan Master Board The Scan Master Board controls the main functions of the digitizer which are related to the image data acquisition. The board has to support two operating levels, low resolution and high resolution. Therefore timing, frequency and converters need to be controlled.

Photomultiplier Tube Control: Controls the Photomultiplier itself, the high voltage settings and receives the current/voltage (I/V) converter signal.

Connector (female) to Photomultiplier Tube

Polygon Control: Controls via the Polygon the deflection of the laser beam on the image plate, controls the rotational speed and detects the facets. RF-Tag Reader Control: Controls the transmitter and receiver signals for reading out demographic data of the ADC Cassette. User terminal Control: Controls the user terminal via a 20 mA interface.

Connector (female) to Polygon

Connector (male) to RF-Reader

Connector (female) to User terminal

IO-BUS Control: Provides the IO-BUS with power and is connected via eight data lines and three control lines to the IO-BUS. Connector (female) to IO-Bus Laser diode Module Control: Controls the power supply of the laser diode of the laser module, controls the power switch of the laser diode, controls Begin-of-Line Signal and Laser-Power-Monitor board.

Connector (male) to Laser Diode Module 5146_reg02_013.cdr

figure 20 DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

3.12.3


cPCI Power Supply

Legend to the LEDs below, showing the Output voltages Green LEDs to monitor power supply

5146_reg02_014.cdr

figure 21

During normal operation the LEDs monitor 5.1 V and 3.3 V voltage levels.

Effects of Interlock Switches: The power supply of the cPCI Rack is not interrupted by the interlock switch at right side panel. This independent supply makes it possible to update software or work out other actions at the rack while right side panel of the digitizer is open. The power supply of the cPCI Rack is interrupted by the interlock switch of the front door. At the rack is no action possible while front door of the digitizer is open.





DD+DIS219.06E

3.12.4


Hard Disk The gray rectangle in the partition map marks the directories which are only necessary for remote control via http access.

Partitions

Directories and subdirectories

C:

CGI-BIN PUBLIC DL IMAGES

Annotations

*.BAT STARTUP.COM *.PPC ERROR.MSG *.ESX

batch

*.PPC

program files

program files error message files tables

*.html

html files

*.zip

zip files

*.GIF *.JPG

*.SYS AOS.LOG ADC.CPF *.AXX *.CXX *.UXX ICN_XXXX.DAT C35_.ICN

D:

E:

Files

system files current log file configuration files infocounter (binary form) infocounter (text form)

SHD

*.TBL *.SHD *.TEMP

tables calibration files

HTTP

HTTPTEMP.OUT

temporary files

FLATFLD

CONTROL.DAT IMAGE.DAT

FLATFLD2


TESTIMG


test image (Collection of diagnostic images)

TSHEET


testsheet of the optimum image quality

FLD00001

CONTROL.DAT IMAGE.DAT STATUS TAGFILE

image control file + demographic data image data

FLD00002


image control file + demographic data image data only when emergency mode is activated change of status

FLD00010


image control file + demographic data image data only when emergency mode is activated change of status

LOG SCCTMP

*.SES

session files

BOLIMAGE.DAT BOLIMAGE.INF MFAIMAGE.DAT MFAIMAGE.INF SHDIMAGE.DAT SHDIMAGE.INF

temporary directory

SNAPSHOT

*.LOG

uncompressed logfiles (without quickcheck and machine state)

*.TXT

change of status

5158_reg02_32.cdr

figure 22





DD+DIS219.06E

3.13


Power Unit Function of the power unit is to supply erasure unit, VME-Rack, stepper motors and stepper motor boards with power. Power integration board is part of the unit.

4

5

1

2

3

figure 23

(1)

Main switch

(2)

Interlock switch

(3)

Power integration board

(4)

Fuse for Power Unit (2 A, slowblow – Si 201)

(5)

Fuse for Stepper motor transformer (2 A, slowblow – Si 202)





DD+DIS219.06E

3.13.1


Power Integration Board Main functions of power integration board are: •

Recognition and control of the required periphery

•

•

Vacuum pump

•

Magnetic valve

•

Erasure unit fan

•

Power unit fan

Check of the following units directly via hard- or software

•

•

Magnetic valve

•

Interlock for SM-voltage

•

Stepper motor voltage of the transformer

•

Erasure unit fan

•

Vacuum pump (indirectly via current of the pump motor)

LED's for error analysis

ST2

BU5

BU6

BU7

ST4 BU4

5158_reg02_015.cdr

figure 24

NOTE: Only the LEDs marked with a star are lighting in a machine that is in proper condition.

ST2

Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in cassette unit (+ 40 V)

BU5

Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in scan unit (+ 40 V)





DD+DIS219.06E


4

Cycle of a Cassette in the Digitizer

4.1

Cassette Unit

4.1.1

Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette An ADC Cassette with an exposed Image Plate (IP) inside is set in correct orientation into the I/O slot. The light barrier (1) GS732/734 recognizes the cassette and starts the mechanical process of the digitizer.

1 2

The transport roller (2), moved by motor M701, brings the cassette into the cassette unit.

figure 25

4.1.2

Identification of the Cassette A plastic bolt, activated by the rear slider of the cassette, interrupts the cassette position detection light barrier GS726 (1). As only ADC Cassette have that certain slider, it is made sure that the right cassette in the correct position is inserted.

1

figure 26





DD+DIS219.06E

4.1.3


Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID Data 3

The cassette is lowered (1) by lift motor M703 when a signal of light barrier GS718 comes in. In the lowered position the light barrier GS724 , for starting the clamp mechanism, detects the cassette. The clamp motion is run by motor M705.

2 1

While the cassette unit is moved to the right side (2) the R/F-Tag antenna (3) GS738 and the corresponding R/F-Tag reader GS736 read out the ID-Data from the chip on the cassette.

2

The cassette unit is roughly positioned corresponding to the size of the cassette.

figure 27

4.1.4

Opening the Cassette In the clamped position the light barrier GS716 detects the start for the opening mechanism.

1

The cassette lid is opened by motor M702 with a certain number of steps.

51 55 _re g0 2_ 02 0.c dr

figure 28





DD+DIS219.06E

4.2

Transport Unit

4.2.1

Sucking the IP


The transport robot of the IP transport unit (2), run by motor M601, moves up quickly (see arrow). The suction cups (3) are moved to the right position on the IP. IP transport 0-position is detected by GS604. The vacuum pump GS608 starts (1) to build up low pressure. By opening the solenoid valve GS606 the vacuum is transferred to the suction cups and the IP is sucked.

1

2

3

figure 29

4.2.2

Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit The IP is taken out of the cassette and moved down (see arrow) by the transport robot (1) to the scan unit, driven by motor M601. By passing the light barrier GS446 the scan rollers open (2), driven by motor M401. 1

Vacuum is reduced and suction cups release IP.

2

figure 30





DD+DIS219.06E


4.3

Scan Unit

4.3.1

Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit The IP alignment finger (1) positions the IP (2) relative to scan unit by means of long distance light barrier (3) GS442/444 .

2

IP is moved by alignment finger, until long distance light barrier (3) is interrupted. Afterwards the IP alignment finger moves back until long distance light barrier is no longer interrupted.

3

IP 1

figure 31

The scan rollers close (1) and clamp the IP between. Scan rollers start to roll and move the IP down until its edge reaches the PIN diodes (2).

1

2

figure 32





DD+DIS219.06E

4.3.2


Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path) The IP is moved through the scanner by M402. The scan process is split into a fast and a slow scan direction. The laser power of the laser diode is lead to the IP via optical lenses and a polygon. The light emitted from the IP is transferred by two acrylic light guides to the photo multiplier.

Fast s c

an

5156_reg02_003.cdr

figure 33

4.4

Erasure Unit

4.4.1

Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit As scan process is finished, scan rollers stop to transport the IP in slow scan direction.

1

Erasure lamps (1) switch on. For unloading IP of scan unit the scan rollers turn direction and move IP upwards (see arrow). Suction cups of transport unit are positioned again on the surface of IP and vacuum pump starts. As the IP is sucked the scan rollers (2) move apart and the IP is moved by transport robot to erasure unit. The IP passes the erasure lamps in a certain speed. The speed depends on the format of the cassette and on the examination type. This information was given by the chip on the cassette, read out at the begin of the cycle.

2

figure 34





DD+DIS219.06E


There are different speeds to vary homogeneity and intensity of the erasure effect on the IP. As the complete IP passed the erasure unit, lamps are switched off. The image information on the IP is erased and the blank IP can be used for another Xray exposure.

4.5

Cassette Unit

4.5.1

Putting IP back into Cassette For putting IP back into cassette the cassette unit has to be positioned relative to IP. Cassette unit moves to IP until light barrier GS730 is interrupted (1).

Light barrier

IP

Afterwards cassette unit moves back until light barrier is no longer interrupted (2).

1 Light barrier

IP

Transport robot puts IP back into cassette. Vacuum is switched off and suction cups release IP.

2

Transport robot moves down to home position while cassette is closed. figure 35





DD+DIS219.06E

4.5.2


Putting Cassette out of Digitizer Cassette unit moves to the left while the RFTag (1) changes status of cassette chip to “erased”.

1

Cassette is released by clamping mechanism and lifted.

2

I/O slot of digitizer is unlocked. The transport belt, turned by motor M704 , and transport roller (3) move cassette out of the I/O slot. After removal of the cassette the cassette unit moves to home position.

3

figure 36





DD+DIS219.06E


5

Software Architecture

5.1

Available Software The checks help to find defective or misadjusted parts in the digitizer. Checks available in Service Program of the Digitizer:

5.2

System check

Rough check of complete system creates a file in d:\ snapshot.txt

Send flatfield

1 Calibration pattern 2 Banding pattern

Web Pages The Software of the digitizer allows access from the Internet to the service level of the machine. The access via a graphic User Interface (ADC web pages) is part of the service concept. The web pages follow the structure of the well-known User Terminal. Access via web pages guarantees a convenient and fast service by making use of standard tools. The usage of different ports for these ways allows working simultaneously with FTP, HTTP, and TelNet. Further information, see chapter 3.2.

5.3

Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part Spare parts which are sent with a floppy, need to be included in the system via software. The floppy e.g. of the optic module contains specific settings of production calibration and data of the spare part. This information need to be installed after the spare part is mounted in the digitizer. For other spare parts sent with a floppy only the information for the info counter is included. The floppy is put into the floppy drive of the cPCI-Rack and the installation starts automatically. The information concerning the spare part is integrated in the system.





cPCI Backplane

RAM

Demographic Data Raw Data (to Partition C:

Partition D:

Image Data

Lowpass Filter

Proc. Station)


cPCI Unit

Ethernet 100 Mbit



I/V converter


Service PC

DD+DIS219.06E

Raw Data 12 bit

Signal and Data Flow

Legend:

Harddisk

High tension IO-Bus

Polygon

Laser diodes Calculation of scan settings

6

7

Signal Flow

figure 37

10

6.1

Image Data Demographic Data


CPU Oberon Partition E:

Optic Module Cassette Unit

DD+DIS219.06E

6.2


Data Flow

IP data Cassette data Exposure Destination Patient

Conversion of emitted light into current

R/F Tag on the cassette

Photomultiplier Conversion from current to voltage in the I/V - converter

Calculation of: Scanspeed Voltage for high tension of PMT Antialiasing-filter-frequence

Signal compression for grey scale coordination (square rooted)

Signalfiltering to avoid aliasing Revolutions per minute of Polygon

Voltage adaptation for high tension of PMT

Conversion from analog to digital (14bit)

Start of scan with slow scan speed = constant Scan Master board

Raw image data and demographic data via network to processing station

Raw image data in RAM

5146_reg02_056.cdr

figure 38





DD+DIS219.06E

6.3


FLD Directories CONTROL.DAT (Image control file): There are six possible status set in an image control file: queued

Waiting for transmission

sending

Transmission in progress

sent

Transmission completed, waiting for response

transmitted

Positive response from workstation

warning*

Positive response, but file cannot be handled from workstation at the moment Æ new transmission

error*

Faulty file, transmission cancelled

NOTE: Only images being in a status marked with a "*" can be deleted from the queue management. STATUS A status file will only be created when the operator pushes the emergency button. TAGFILE File date and time when the status is changed.





DD+DIS219.06E

7


Calibration Principle There are two different calibrations to work out with the Digitizer in the field. The IP Center Calibration, which is necessary after replacement of the optic module or a change on the mechanical adjustment of the begin of scan sensor, and the shading calibration which is responsible for the image quality and follows always after an IP Center Calibration.

7.1

IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment) The IP center calibration adjusts two different scan signal settings in one process, the begin of line (BOL) signal for the fast scan direction and the begin of scan (BOS) signal for slow scan direction. Both signals in combination are responsible for the area which is scanned and where pixels are created.

7.1.1

BOL Sensor The BOL sensor is a pin diode placed in the optic module. It controls the switching off and on of the laser. The sensor is beside the IP, therefore the laser beam hits the sensor before the IP. Out of the defined distance between the sensor and the border of the IP the moment of reading out the pixel lines on the IP is set.

7.1.2

BOS Sensor The BOS sensor is a long distance light barrier which is placed at the bottom part of the scan unit. The light barrier gives the signal to start the scan process in slow scan direction. When the IP reaches the sensor it is detected and then passes a fixed distance to the begin of scan line, then the scan process starts.

7.1.3

Calibration Procedure The IP center calibration is worked out with an IP format smaller than 35 x 43 cm. In reference to this biggest format the borders around the scanned IP are detected.

BOS BOL

The distance corresponding to the BOS signal is measured from the geometrical reference to the border where the scanning of the IP starts. The ideal distance is defined with 5 mm.

BOL IP e.g. 24 x 30 cm format

Area covered by a 35 x 43 cm IP (reference)

The both distances measured to adjust the BOL signal must be equal, means the IP is scanned in figure 39 centered position.

5146_reg02_059.cdr





DD+DIS219.06E

7.2


Shading Calibration Inhomogeneities of the light collector (acrylic light guide) and the photomultiplier require a position dependent calibration of the scan line. This pixel wise line calibration evens out differences in the transmission behavior of the acrylic light guide by calculation. Each scanned pixel in a line is corrected arithmetically by its corresponding correction value (shading correction). This is done for each of the three speed classes 600, 200, and 75. A number of lines of a flat field image are averaged and scaled to the maximum pixel value. All the lines need to be in a certain range to make the calibration successful, if not the error is displayed at the user terminal. The calibration curves can be viewed by using a web browser. (see chapter 3.2) Three curves for each format are displayed in one image and distinguished by three different colors.

figure 40

The y-axis of the coordinate system shows the Scan Average Level (SAL) which is the digital value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The x-axis shows the number of pixels.





Chapter 3.1

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document describes safety guidelines and general repair instructions. It also contains all product specific safety notes used in this Service Manual.

►

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006



•

Updated type label, see section 3.2, page 13.


Title

Service Bulletin




Document Node ID: 12401811 eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v02


Repair and Service Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

DD+DIS219.06E



(2)





Chapter 3.1 / 2 Agfa Company Confidential

DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

PRODUCT SPECIFIC SAFETY DIRECTIONS ........................................................................4 1.1

General .....................................................................................................................................4

1.2

Safety Directions for the Installation .........................................................................................4

1.3

To be considered upon Repairs on the CR 35-X......................................................................5

1.4

To be considered with mechanical Tests of Stepper Motor controlled Drive Units .................6

1.5

Safety Switches of CR35-X Digitizer ........................................................................................6

1.6

Safety Directions for the Optic Module .....................................................................................7

1.7

Safety Directions for the Photomuliplier Module (PMM) ...........................................................9

1.8

Safety Directions for the Erasure Unit ......................................................................................9

2

SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CASSETTES AND IMAGE PLATES........................................10

3

LABELS ..................................................................................................................................11 3.1

Markings and Labels...............................................................................................................11

3.2

Position of the Type Label ......................................................................................................13






DD+DIS219.06E

1

Product specific Safety Directions

1.1

General With every repair work check the following points visually:

1.2

•

Condition of the insulation of the mains plug / mains cable.

•

Effects of the strain relief for the mains cable.

•

Efficiency of the protective earth on metal panel parts (protective earth connected and spring contacts OK).

•

Correct condition of the protection covers.

Safety Directions for the Installation

CAUTION: Transportation parts can damage the product. Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation.

CAUTION: Risk of damaging the digitizer by wrong voltage selection. Prior to first operation check voltage selector at rear side of digitizer. If the voltage adaption is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch to correct position.






DD+DIS219.06E

1.3

To be considered upon Repairs on the CR 35-X The machine must be protected against accidental activation during repair work. For this purpose we recommend to attach the following sign on the main switch while repairing the machine.

Do not activate!

Repairs in progress!

Repairs in progress.

Location:...................... Sign must only be removed by: ..................

figure 1

WARNING: Risk of electric shock! Switch off the digitizer and disconnect from the mains before performing any service interventions at the digitizer.

CAUTION: Danger of cutting! Due to changed production methods, all parts of metal frame can be sharp-edged. Take special care when servicing the interior of the digitizer

Wear safety shoes while removing scan unit.






DD+DIS219.06E

1.4

To be considered with mechanical Tests of Stepper Motor controlled Drive Units If a stepper motor driven shaft must be turned for checking a mechanical function, make sure to disconnect the stepper motor first on the corresponding control board (This is to avoid destruction of the stepper motor control board by induction). If this is not possible, turn the stepper motor only slowly.

1.5

Safety Switches of CR35-X Digitizer There are safety switches at the front door (A) and at the right side panel (B).

A

The safety switches interrupt the mains voltage supply when the front door is opened or the right side panel is removed.

B

figure 2: Positions of safety switches

WARNING: If the safety switch is overridden with a service key there are risks of injuries. Keep your hair, hands and garments away from the device. Remove service key before the device is handed over to the customer. Laser beam! Risk of serious eye damage! Avoid direct and indirect eye contact with the laser beam. Do not hold any tools in the laser beam - risk of reflection. Consider that the service key must be removed again before the doors are closed. After use of the service key, the function of the safety switch has to be checked. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS219.06E

1.6


Safety Directions for the Optic Module

The CR 35-X is a Class 1 Laser Product. It uses internally a laser diode, classification class IIIb. Under normal operating conditions - device with all covers - there can be no laser radiation outside the DX-S.

WARNING: Laser beam! - Risk of serious eye damage! Do not expose to laser beam directly.

.

Do not hold any tools into the laser beam (risk of reflection). During any service intervention concerning the scan unit, the digitizer must be switched off

CAUTION: Risk of injury when removing the scan unit! To remove the scan unit safely, use the digitizer ramp. Check that both adjustable feet are touching the ground before removal of the scan unit.






DD+DIS219.06E

Observe the Caution instructions on the Optical module label:

The positions of labels referring to laser radiation are placed here:

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASERKLASSE 1

51

56

3 g0 _re

00 . 1_

dr 2 .c

figure 3: Warning labels referring to laser radiation DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.





DD+DIS219.06E

1.7

Safety Directions for the Photomuliplier Module (PMM) CAUTION: Risk of damage! Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.

1.8

Safety Directions for the Erasure Unit WARNING: The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 °C: Risk of burns. Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit. Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit, see figure 4.

200

c

figure 4: Warning labels at erasure unit





DD+DIS219.06E

2


Safety Directions for Cassettes and Image Plates CAUTION: Wrong screen cleaner may damage the Image plate. Do not use the AGFA CR phosphor plate cleaner to clean the CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates. Use PROSAT wipers instead.

CAUTION: Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes: Only cassettes with both labels “CR MD4.2 Extremities” and “Extremities code XX” must be used for the Extremities application (XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL). Other cassettes must not be used.

WARNING: Poor image quality caused by incorrect cassette initialization. Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the corresponding user manual.






DD+DIS219.06E

3

Labels

3.1

Markings and Labels Always take into account the markings and labels provided on the inside and outside of the machine. A brief overview of these markings and labels and their meaning is given below. WARNING: Risk of electric shock. Shocks can cause severe injuries. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any covers

WARNING: The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 °C: Risk of burns. Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit. Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.

Type B equipment: Indicates that the CR 35-X complies with the limits for type B equipment. Supplementary protective earth connector: Provides a connection between the CR 35-X and the potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug should never be unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug has been removed. Intergrounding connector: Provides a connection between the Digitizer and other equipment which might exhibit minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade the quality of communication between different equipment. Never remove connections to this terminal.






DD+DIS219.06E

Protective earth (ground): 0 Provides a connection between the Digitizer and the protective earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because this will have a negative influence on the leakage current. Power on Power off: Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains. CAUTION: Precautions for use in USA only: Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the Digitizer is connected to a 240 V / 60 Hz source instead of a 120 V / 60 Hz source.

CAUTION: Risk of injury during cassette insertion: Fingers if they are caught between the cassetteand the edge of the input slot may become trapped. Insert the cassette in the input buffer as described in the User Manual. At all times, keep your fingers clear of the input slot. As soon as the digitizer takes in the cassette, release it. Note warning label at the Input buffer of the digitizer.






DD+DIS219.06E

3.2

Position of the Type Label

figure 5: Position of the type label





Chapter 3.2

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Tools and Auxiliary Means


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document describes tools and auxiliary means.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin




Document Node ID: 12403681 eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v02


Repair and Service Tools and Auxiliary Means

DD+DIS219.06E



(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT ..............................................................5

2

SERVICE PC (STANDARD).....................................................................................................5

3

SERVICE PROGRAM OF THE DIGITIZER .............................................................................6 3.1

Overview ...................................................................................................................................6

3.2

Working with the Operation Terminal .......................................................................................8

3.2.2

General Information ..................................................................................................................9

3.3

Active Keys / Allowed Functions .............................................................................................10

3.4

Screen Layout .........................................................................................................................11

3.5

INFO........................................................................................................................................12

3.5.1

Device Info ..............................................................................................................................12

3.5.2

Network Info ............................................................................................................................13

3.6

MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................................14

3.6.1

SAL-Inspection........................................................................................................................14

3.6.2

Calibration ...............................................................................................................................16

3.6.3

Test Cycle ...............................................................................................................................22

3.6.4

Confirm Maintenance..............................................................................................................25

3.6.5

Confirm Repair ........................................................................................................................26

3.6.6

Confirm Modification ...............................................................................................................28

3.6.7

Confirm Installation .................................................................................................................29

3.6.8

Clear Infocounter ....................................................................................................................30

3.7

SAVE on Floppy......................................................................................................................30

3.7.1

Infocounter File .......................................................................................................................30

3.7.2

Machine specific Data.............................................................................................................32

3.7.3

Service Report ........................................................................................................................33

3.7.4

Snapshot Logs ........................................................................................................................34

3.7.5

Session Files...........................................................................................................................36

3.7.6

CPF File ..................................................................................................................................37

3.7.7

Alert Log File ...........................................................................................................................38

3.8

SHOW Error ............................................................................................................................39

3.8.1

Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................39





DD+DIS219.06E


3.8.2

Error Hit List ............................................................................................................................40

3.9

INSTALL from Floppy .............................................................................................................41

3.9.1

Software ..................................................................................................................................41

3.9.2

Machine-specific Data.............................................................................................................44

3.9.3

PMT Settings mfa / mfb ..........................................................................................................45

3.9.4

Optic Parameters ....................................................................................................................46

3.9.5

Scanner Parameters ...............................................................................................................47

3.9.6

CPF File ..................................................................................................................................49

3.9.7

Language Files .......................................................................................................................51

3.9.8

HW Modification ID .................................................................................................................53

3.10

CONFIGURE...........................................................................................................................54

3.10.1

Local Network ID.....................................................................................................................54

3.10.2

User Terminal Language ........................................................................................................55

3.10.3

Active Alert System.................................................................................................................56

3.10.4

Alert System Status ................................................................................................................57

3.10.5

Alert Destination......................................................................................................................57

3.10.6

Send Test Alert .......................................................................................................................58

3.10.7

Set up Direct ID.......................................................................................................................59

3.10.8

Add-on Application..................................................................................................................59

3.11

CHECKS .................................................................................................................................60

3.11.1

System Check .........................................................................................................................61

3.11.2

Send Image.............................................................................................................................61






DD+DIS219.06E

1

Recommended Tools and Test Equipment In addition to the common tools every service engineer is carrying in his tool box, the following auxiliary equipment is required for the service on the Digitizer:

2

Equipment

Spare Part Number

Application

*service PC

See section 2

service programs

*Interface cable CM+9 5120 9030 0 RS232, 9 pin / 25 pins SUB D

connection service PC – Digitizer

lens cleaning set

MX+06-07-015

cleaning of optical parts

test images CD ROM

CM+9 5145 3055 0

checking image quality

ground tape

CM+9 9999 0830 0

replacement of printed circuit boards / EPROMs

safety lacquer

-

to be used after electronic or mechanical adjustments

CCM tool

see MedNet

configuration tool

Cu filter

CM+9 5155 1015 2

test exposures

Service PC (standard) NOTE: The Service PC is used: to create the adc.cpf file with the CCM tool to do service via terminal emulation to run the show error program

As service PC you can use any commercially available laptop. Service PC connection: Via a RS232 interface on the Digitizer (behind the front door).






DD+DIS219.06E

3

Service Program of the Digitizer

3.1

Overview Service level 1

Service level 2

Service level 3

1 INFO

1 Device info

-

2 Network info 2 MAINTENANCE

1 SAL inspection 2 Calibration

1 IP Center calibration 2 Shading calibration

3 Test cycle

1 Scan with transmission 2 Scan cycle – no image 3 Scan – no era, no imgage

4 Confirm maintenance 5 Confirm repair 6 Confirm modification 7 Confirm installation 8 Clear infocounter 3 SAVE on floppy

1 Infocounter file

-

2 Machine specific data 3 Service report 4 Snapshot log 5 Session files 6 CPF file 7 Alert log file 4 SHOW error

1 Explain error code

-

2 Error hit list






DD+DIS219.06E

Service level 1

Service level 2

Service level 3

5 INSTALL from floppy

1 Software

-

2 Machine specific data 3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb) 4 Optic parameters 5 Scanner parameters 6 CPF file 7 Language files 8 HW modification ID 6 CONFIGURE

1 Local network ID 2 User terminal language 3 Active alert system

1 Alert system status 2 Alert destination 3 Send test alert

4 Direct ID 5 Add on applications

1 Mammography (50 µ) 2 GenRad (50 µ) 3 Full Leg Full Spine

7 CHECKS

1 System check 2 Send image

1 Test image (mosaic) 2 Flatfield (calibration pattern) 3 Flatfield (banding pattern) 4 Test Sheet (jitter pattern) 5 Blue LED test image 6 Mammo test image 1 7 Mammo test image 2






DD+DIS219.06E

3.2

Working with the Operation Terminal

5155_reg01_002.cdr

figure 1 3.2.1.1

Password •

Starts or finishes Service Menu

Password?

515562be.cdr

figure 2 Enter password! A wrong password results in a long beep. The message "Wrong password!" appears.

Wrong password!

515562ce.cdr

figure 3






DD+DIS219.06E NOTE:

If the correct password has not been entered within 4 seconds, the program returns to the main menu of the key-operator level. If no key is touched after pressing the service key within 60 sec, the program returns to the operator level.

3.2.2

General Information The infocounter file must be contained in the backup (to be restored after fresh SW installation). After fresh SW installation the FSE is asked to restore the infocounter and the CPF file, e.g. “Restore infocounter and CPF file” After each intervention where machine specific data, network settings or language settings are changed, a display message must appear telling: “Parameters have changed, refresh your backup”. As long as the installation has not been confirmed, the operator is asked after each startup if he wants to confirm. The message is shown on the LCD with repeated beeps after a successful startup. If confirm is answered positively, the software branches directly to the “Confirm installation” option. After confirmation it returns to the operator level. The function can be cancelled until next startup.

Installation not yet confirmed! Press

to confirm now

Installation Confirmation

: cancel : ok Service XXXX 515562de.cdr

figure 4






DD+DIS219.06E

3.3

Active Keys / Allowed Functions ok - starts the highlighted function cancel - cancels the function and returns to the next higher menu level forward or backward scrolling tag - possibility to select several items out of a list returns immediately to the operator level, exits the service level

All other keys are inactive and cause a long beep when typing them. No timeout is foreseen in the service level. You can choose between four different action modes: 1. Selection mode •

The currently selected item appears highlighted (inverse display).

•

When you enter a new menu, always the first item of the list is selected by default.

•

A new item can be selected by using the up and down keys <

•

Multiple selections (tags) can be done using < > keys (known as toggles/selections).

•

Press < > to confirm your selection or to enter the highlighted sub-menu.

•

Press < > to exit the current menu and to return to the next higher level.

>.

2. Instruction mode •

In this mode, read the given instructions carefully and follow them step by step.

•


3. Information mode •

In this mode, information can be read on the display. No interactions are possible.






DD+DIS219.06E 4. Decision mode

3.4

•

In this mode, you will be prompted to confirm or cancel the proposed action.

•

In case a decision is required a double beep comes up every 10 seconds.

•

Press < > to confirm the action, return to the higher level or to enter the next screen.

•


Screen Layout The same screen layout is used for all service menus. The screen is subdivided into four windows.

Service menu

2 : cancel 3 : ok

1

Service XXXX 4 515562ee.cdr

figure 5

the action window

displays selection lists, instructions, information, questions

orientation window

displays the current service menu level

key help window

explains the meaning of the involved keypad buttons

service message window

displays service messages

and

is displayed if scroll functionality is requested, e.g. if a list cannot be shown in total

and

is displayed if selection functionality is requested, e.g. if several items have to be marked in a list






DD+DIS219.06E

3.5

INFO Information about the device, the network, date and time. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

INFO MAINTENANCE SAVE on floppy SHOW error INSTALL from floppy CONFIGURE CHECKS

Service menu OVERVIEW  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 6 3.5.1

Device Info Detailed device information. 1 Device info 2 Network info

Service menu Info  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 7

NOTE: •

The station name is displayed, not the hostname

•

S/N shows the serial# without 5158

and are taken from the “AE_title” respective “StationName” cpf items in the following cpf table:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 1 2 3 4 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Station: Service menu S/N: 1024 Info AE-title: Device info Software: c25 2007  Total cycles: 34567 Next PM: 60424 :ok Last rep.: 01-Jan-1970  02-Mar-2004 14:24:58 SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E 3.5.2

Network Info Detailed network information 1 Device info 2 Network info

Service menu Info Network info  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 9 The hostname is displayed is taken from the “hostname” item in the following cpf table: Hostname: IP-addr: 192.9.200.201 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 D-Router: 192.9.200.254 Mail-Host:192.9.200.210

Service menu INFO Network info 

:ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 10






DD+DIS219.06E

3.6

MAINTENANCE Access to maintenance functions Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



figure 11 3.6.1

SAL-Inspection Scope of application: Procedure to measure the average scan level of an image plate as a result of a certain stimulation energy. This information can be used in two ways. Either to decide whether the IP needs to be erased or to find out the correct exposure parameters for a given Xray device. The measured value (scan average level) is displayed on the LCD. Additionally the corresponding scan line is displayed on the LCD. Carrying out: The IP to be inspected is placed into the cassette entry slot and scanned consecutively with a default speed class setting of 200 - this speed class can be changed by means of the arrows. For each pixel the average of 100 lines is taken: ± 50 lines to the middle line - the function applies for all formats as initialized on the cassette RF-Tag. The IP will be erased after this scan with default erasure dose (same as in ERASEmode). As long as this menu is active the operator can put as many cassettes into the cassette entry slot as needed. The action starts when the cassette is in the cassette entry slot. The function is active as long as the cassette is in the cassette entry slot. After display of the scan result the screen needs to be confirmed. If an identified cassette is detected a warning is displayed and the user has to confirm the function (see erase function). Settings:  : select speed class: 25-50-75-100-150-200-300-400-600-800-1200 (default speed class = 200) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.





DD+DIS219.06E Layout: 4 digits are reserved for speed class and SAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SAL-inspection Calibration Test cycle Confirm maintenance Confirm repair Confirm modification Confirm installation Clear infocounter

Service menu Maintenance  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 12

Please select the speed class for SAL inspection 200 ...select with  or

Service menu Maintenance SAL inspection  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 13 Default speed class = 200

Place cassette for inspection into the cassette entry slot

Service menu Maintenance SAL inspection  :cancel  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 14

SAL inspection pending. Wait for result...

Service menu Maintenance SAL inspection   SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E

 Cassette ID: XXXXX SAL: 264 ...press

to continue

Service menu Maintenance SAL inspection  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 16 The scanned line is displayed on the LCD, the screen comes with a double beep.

3.6.2

(1)

Press to confirm the SAL-Inspection for that IP. If available, the next IP in the row is inspected.

(2)

Press

to cancel the function and returns to the next higher level.

Calibration Scope of application: Procedure to determine shading correction factors for all image plate formats. The resulting scan line is displayed on the LCD. Additional information about cassette formats, calibration results, possible fail reasons and detected SAL is given. Carrying out: (1)

Select “Calibration” from the maintenance menu.

(2)

Expose a cassette according to the calibration exposure instructions.

(3)

Insert exposed cassette.

(4)

If necessary, select the format to be calibrated from the displayed list.

(5)

If calibration fails, repeat exposure with adapted values or check the optics if displayed scan line is interrupted.

(6)

If the function is cancelled, the user is prompted to remove the cassette and to press confirm.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8








DD+DIS219.06E Exceptions:

If an identified cassette (regular identification via ID station, status exposed, to be erased) is detected, a warning is displayed and the user has to confirm the calibration function.

Messages: Cassette is identified with patient data.

Cassette is identified with patient data. Press to calibrate or to scan.

Service menu Maintenance Calibration  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 18

3.6.2.1

IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS) 1 IP Center Calibration 2 Shading Calibration

Service menu Maintenance Calibration  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 19

Exposure parameters: Filter: 1.5 mm Cu 2 exposures a 10 microGy turn 180 degree (Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, 12 mAs, 75 kVp) Insert cassette 24x30cm or smaller.

Service menu Calibration IP Center  :cancel  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 20 If a format 10 x 8", 24 x 18 cm, 24 x 30 cm is detected, the calibration procedure starts immediately.






DD+DIS219.06E

IP Center Calibration pending...

Service menu Calibration IP Center   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 21

IP Center Calibration successful.

Service menu Calibration IP Center 

Run a Shading Calib. now (Recommended).


figure 22 In case IP Center Calibration adjustment was successful. (1)

Press

to return to the calibration screen.

IP Center Calibration Failed - underexposed "Dose is too low" ...press

to repeat

Service menu Calibration IP Center  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 23 In case IP Center Calibration adjustment fails, dose is too low. The screen returns to “Exposure parameters”. (2)

Press







DD+DIS219.06E

IP Center Calibration Failed - overexposed "Dose is too high" ...press

to repeat

Service menu Calibration IP Center  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 24 In case IP Center Calibration adjustment fails, dose is too high. The screen returns to “Exposure parameters”. (3) 3.6.2.2

Press


Shading Calibration Which format shall be calibrated? 35x43 cm fast 35x43 cm slow 24x30 cm Mammo

ok ok

Service menu Calibration Shading  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 25 (1)

Press


(2)

Press

to enter next screen.

The screen comprises the cassette size information (e.g. 35 x 43 cm) and the calibration step (e.g. fast). If a smaller format than the proposed one is entered, the following screen pops up: Format is smaller than recommended! Shading calibration will only be valid for calibrated format and smaller ones.

Service menu Calibration Shading  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 26 (3)

Press


(4)

Press

to enter next screen.






DD+DIS219.06E

Exposure parameters: Filter: 1.5 mm Cu 2 exposures a 10 microGy turn 180 degree (Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, 12 mAs, 75 kVp) Insert cassette 35x43cm

Service menu Calibration Shading  :cancel  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 27 The action starts as soon as a cassette is inserted Calibration of format pending...

Service menu Calibration Shading   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 28 is: 35 x 43 cm

fast

this corresponds to a pixel time of 1 µs, 100 µm mode

35 x 43 cm

slow

this corresponds to a pixel time of 2 µs, 100 µm mode

24 x 30 cm

Mammo this corresponds to a pixel time of 1 µs, 50 µm mode

 35x43 cm fast Calibration successful SAL: 2356, Dose okay ...press to continue

Service menu Calibration Shading 


figure 29 In case of a successful calibration the calibration line is stored automatically (no interaction necessary). (5)

Press

to return to the shading calibration menu.






DD+DIS219.06E

In case the exposure dose was too low, the following screen pops up with a long beep:

 35x43 cm fast Failure - underexposed! SAL: 1648, try 2x mAs ...press to repeat



figure 30 In case the exposure dose was too high, the following screen pops up with a long beep:

 35x43 cm fast Failure - overexposed! SAL: 4096, try half mAs ...press to repeat



figure 31 Digitizer is now waiting for next exposed cassette to be calibrated or returns to the shading calibration screen. In case the cassette was not entirely exposed or the optics are not adjusted, the following screen pops up with a long beep:

 35x43 cm fast Calibration failed! Check coll. and optics ...press to repeat



figure 32 Digitizer is now waiting for next exposed cassette to be calibrated or returns to the shading calibration screen.






DD+DIS219.06E 3.6.3

Test Cycle Starts endurance cycles to check the reliability of the mechanics 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



figure 33 3.6.3.1

Scan with Transmission •

requires identified cassette

•

cycles cassette and IP

•

scans the IP

•

erases IP

•

transmits image as identified

•

informs about the current cycle number

•

action runs until the selected number of cycles is reached

•

can be aborted with

Layout: 4 digits are reserved for number of cycles 1 2 3 4

Scan with transmission Scan cycle – no image Scan – no era, no img Handling cycle

Service menu Maintenance Test cycle  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 34

Use ↑↓ and ←→ to select no of cycles: XXXX

Service menu Maintenance Test cycle  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E

No of cycles selected: 150 Current run:

64

Service menu Maintenance Test cycle  :cancel  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 36 3.6.3.2

Scan Cycle - No Image •


•


•

scans the IP

•

erases IP

•

does not transmit the image

•

informs about the current cycle number

•


•

can be aborted with

Layout: 4 digits are reserved for number of cycles 1 2 3 4

Scan with transmission Scan cycle - no image Scan - no era, no img Handling cycle


figure 37

Use ↑↓ and ←→ to select no of cycles: XXXX

Service menu MAINTENANCE Test cycle  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E

No of cycles selected: 150 Current run: 64

Service menu MAINTENANCE Test cycle  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 39 3.6.3.3

Scan - no era, no img •


•


•

scans IP

•

does not erase

•


•


•

can be aborted with

1 2 3 4



figure 40 The user is informed about the mode. Schematic layout, see menu “Scan cycle – no img”.






DD+DIS219.06E 3.6.3.4

Handling Cycle •

cycles regardless if cassette is identified or not

•

cycles IP

•

does not scan IP

•

does not erase

•


•


•

can be aborted with

1 2 3 4



figure 41 The user is informed about the mode. Schematic layout, see menu “Scan cycle – no img”. 3.6.4

Confirm Maintenance Scope of application: Procedure to confirm a finished preventive maintenance with date and counter stamp. The entry is saved in the info counter file. After pressing confirm, the operator is asked if he wants to clear the relative counters. The reset of the relative counters is linked to the event “Maintenance”. Layout: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



figure 42






DD+DIS219.06E

To confirm this maintenance press Meter reading: xxxxxx Date:

Service menu Maintenance Confirm PM  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 43 (1)

Press

to return to the maintenance screen.

(2)

Press

to enter the next screen.

Do you want me to clear the info counters? (recommended)

Service menu Maintenance Confirm PM  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 44

3.6.5

(3)

Press


(4)

Press

to clear the relative info counter entries.

Confirm Repair Scope of application: Procedure to confirm a successful repair with date stamp. The entry is saved in the info counter file. After pressing confirm, the operator is asked if he wants to clear the relative counters. The reset of the relative counters is linked to the event “Repair”. Layout: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8








DD+DIS219.06E

To confirm a successful repair press Meter reading: xxxxxx Date:

Service menu Maintenance Confirm repair  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 46 (1)

Press


(2)

Press



Service menu Maintenance Confirm repair  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 47 (3)

Press

(4)

. Press

to return to the maintenance screen. to clear the relative info counter entries.






DD+DIS219.06E

3.6.6

Confirm Modification Layout: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



figure 48

To confirm a successful modification press Meter reading: xxxxxx Date:

Service menu Maintenance Confirm modif.  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 49 (1)

Press


(2)

Press



Service menu Maintenance Confirm modif  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 50

(3)

Press


(4)

Press







DD+DIS219.06E

3.6.7

Confirm Installation Scope of application: Procedure to confirm the device installation with a date stamp. The entry is saved in the info counter file. The confirmation automatically clears the relative info counter entries. Layout: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



figure 51 (1)

Press


(2)

Press


To confirm this installation press Date:

Service menu Maintenance Install date  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 52

(3)

Press


(4)

Press







DD+DIS219.06E 3.6.8

Clear Infocounter Scope of application: Free option to clear the relative infocounter entries without a forced link to a special service intervention. The reset is linked in the infocounter file to the dummy event ”Test”. Date and counter stamp are added. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



figure 53

3.7

SAVE on Floppy Save files on floppy. Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



figure 54

3.7.1

Infocounter File (1)

Select this menu to save the info counter file on floppy. - By default, the data is saved under A:\C25.ICN Example: A:\C252034A.ICN - If there already is an info counter file on the floppy, the last letter of the file name is increased in alphabetical order (no files are overwritten!).






DD+DIS219.06E

- Info counters (relative counters) can be cleared by means of maintenance or repair confirmation or manually by selecting menu ”Clear infocounter”. - Exceptions (e.g. error handling, messages in case of no floppy available, write protection, full floppy, etc.) are displayed on the LCD as clear and understandable text, e.g. ”Floppy is write protected”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Info counter file Machine specific data Service report Snapshot log Session files CPF-File Alert log file

Service menu SAVE  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 55

Please insert a floppy and press

Service menu SAVE Info counter  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 56 Service menu SAVE Info counter 

copying... D: To A:

 SERVICE XXXXX

figure 57

Please remove the floppy and press

Service menu SAVE Info counter 

:ok  SERVICE XXXXX figure 58






DD+DIS219.06E 3.7.2

Machine specific Data (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to create a backup floppy with machine-specific data.



figure 59 (2)

Click . A zipped file C25_.zip containing all backup files, is created on the hard disk.


Service menu SAVE Machine data  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 60

•

the floppy gets a volume label C25_

•

the zip file is copied to A:\C25_.BAC\C25_.zip

•

an existing backup sub-directory is being renamed to A:\C25_.BCO

•

the zip file under an already existing A:\C25_.BCO directory is being overwritten

copying... D:\C25_.zip To A:

Service menu SAVE Machine data   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 61






DD+DIS219.06E

(3)

At the end, the following screen is displayed. Label the floppy as described.

Label the floppy: Backup CR25.0 S/N: Date: SW-version: c25_2007 Please remove the floppy and press

Service menu SAVE Machine data 


figure 62 3.7.3

Service Report (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to create a service report during a service session. •

a service session starts when the service mode is activated

•

all activities are logged with date and time stamp

•

ring buffer principle with 20 sessions

•

saves the service report file on floppy

•

the data is saved under A:\C25_.RPT, e.g. A:\C25_2046.RPT

•

an existing report file is being renamed to *.RPO

•

an existing *.RPO file is being overwritten



figure 63


Service menu SAVE Service report  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E

copying... D: to A:

Service menu SAVE Service report   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 65


Service menu SAVE Service report 

:ok  SERVICE XXXXX figure 66 3.7.4

Snapshot Logs (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to copy a Snapshot log (compressed) on floppy. •

the files are saved under A:\C25__incrementing id.zip, e.g. A:\C25_2046_2060B_2.zip

•

one, several or all snapshot log can be selected (tagged) by means of the  - keys

•

tagged files are marked with <∗>

•

if there are more files in the list than can be displayed a <↓> symbolizes the scroll option

•

if there is not enough disk space another floppy is asked for



figure 67 (2)

Press

to go back to the menu “save on floppy”.

(3)

Press

to go to next screen.






DD+DIS219.06E

All Snapshot logs 2060B_2 04-Feb-04 11:26* 2060B_1 01-Feb-04 10:43* 247B0_1 23-Jan-04 17:08

Service menu Save Snapshot log  :cancel :ok :tag  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 68

copying... D: to A:

Service menu SAVE Snapshot log   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 69

Floppy is full. Please insert another floppy and press

Service menu SAVE Snapshot log  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 70


Service menu SAVE Snapshot log  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 71






DD+DIS219.06E 3.7.5

Session Files (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to copy session files (compressed) on floppy. •

the files are saved under A:\C25_\#.ses, e.g. A:\C25_2046\143.ses

•

one, several or all session files can be selected (tagged) by means of the  - keys

•

tagged files are marked with <∗>

•

if there are more files in the list than can be displayed a <↓> symbolizes the scroll option

•

if there is not enough disk space another floppy is asked for

•

leading signs “0” will be suppressed, e.g. 005.ses -> 5.ses


Service menu SAVE Session files  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 72

All session files 1.ses* 2.ses* 3.ses 4.ses 5.ses

Service menu SAVE Session file  :cancel :ok :tag  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 73

copying... D: to A:

Service menu SAVE Session file   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 74






DD+DIS219.06E

Floppy is full. Please insert another floppy and press

Service menu SAVE Session file  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 75 3.7.6

CPF File (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to copy the customer parameter file (CPF) from hard disk to floppy.



figure 76


Service menu SAVE CPF File  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 77

copying... D: to A:

Service menu SAVE CPF File   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 78






DD+DIS219.06E


Service menu SAVE CPF File 

:ok  SERVICE XXXXX figure 79 3.7.7

Alert Log File (1)

Select this menu to copy the alert log file to floppy. -

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

The file contains 50 entries. The format of the file is like the service report. The contents of the sent e-mail is logged. Naming of the file: C25_.ALR, e.g. C25_2046.ALR



figure 80






DD+DIS219.06E

3.8

SHOW Error (1)

Select this menu to - display error codes in clear text - display error hit list. - display explanation of errors and warnings.

Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



figure 81

3.8.1

Explain Error Code (1)

Select this menu to get an explanation of the highlighted error (warning) code. Date and time of occurrence is displayed.

(2)

Selected the code using the keys. The current device error or warning status is highlighted.

1 Explain error code 2 Error hit list

Service menu SHOW error  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 82 Code

Occurred last

XXXXX 04-Feb-97 11:26 XXXXX 26-Jan-97 14:58 XXXXX 12-Jan-97 09:34 XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

Service menu SHOW error Explain code  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E

Messages are sorted by date.

Text...

XXXXX

Service menu Show error Explain code  :cancel ↑↓:scroll  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 84 3.8.2

Error Hit List (1)

Select this menu to get a list of the five most frequent errors.

(2)

Go to menu "Explain error code" to get an explanation of the error code.

(3)

Go back to error hit list with .

1 Explain error code 2 Error hit list

Service menu SHOW error  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 85 Code:

Frequency: absolute relative 00342 00541 95462 12124 99999

27 23 9 4 1

Service menu SHOW error 6 4 4 3 1

Hit list  :cancel :ok ↑↓:scroll SERVICE XXXXX

figure 86






DD+DIS219.06E

3.9

INSTALL from Floppy (1)

Select this menu to copy selected files from floppy to hard disk and initializes new software.

Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



figure 87 3.9.1

Software (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select this menu to copy device software from floppy to hard disk and initialize the new software. •

all concerning file names are displayed during the copy process

•

after software installation the user is prompted to create a new backup floppy

•

an entry is made in the infocounter under SW modification history, date, meter reading

Software Machine specific data PMT settings (mfa/mfb) Optic parameters Scanner parameters cpf-file Language files HW modification ID

Service menu INSTALL  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 88

Please insert the first floppy C252007_1_3 and press

Service menu INSTALL Software  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E

Checking the volume label... Volume is

Service menu INSTALL Software 


figure 90 If the volume label is not correct, a message ”Wrong or missing volume label” pops up (long beep).

copying... A: to E:\temp\

Service menu INSTALL Software  :cancel  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 91 (2)

Insert next floppy.

Please insert the floppy C252007_2_3 And press


figure 92

please wait ... Extracting files from E:\temp



figure 93






DD+DIS219.06E




To initialize the new SW a reset is necessary Press

to reset now



figure 95 (3)

Press

to initialize new software.

(4)

After the first start-up of the new software press a new backup.

New software detected. You should refresh your backup now. Please insert the backup floppy and press

and insert a floppy to create


figure 96 (5)

Press

to go to “Save machine specific data”.






DD+DIS219.06E

3.9.2

Machine-specific Data (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select this menu to restore machine-specific data (machine backup) from floppy to hard disk. •

the volume label is checked

•

the concerning file name C25_.ZIP is displayed during the copy process

•

the zip file is automatically unzipped

Software Machine specific data PMT settings (mfa/mfb) Optic parameters Scanner parameters CPF-file Language files HW modification ID


figure 97

Please insert the backup floppy and press

Service menu INSTALL Machine data  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 98

Please wait... Extracting backup files

Service menu INSTALL Machine data   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 99


Service menu INSTALL Machine data 







DD+DIS219.06E

3.9.3

PMT Settings mfa / mfb (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select this menu to copy file with mfa / mfb from PMT floppy to hard disk. •

overwrites existing files

•

the concerning file name is displayed during the copy process

•

request to save changes on service exit



figure 101 After Photo multiplier change: Please insert the PMT-floppy and press

Service menu INSTALL Mfa/mfb  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 102 (2)

Verify if the serial number of the label is the same as the serial number of the new part. - The SN is displayed on the screen. - The SN is automatically stored in the infocounter under ”hardware replacement ”history

Service menu copying ...

INSTALL Mfa/mfb   SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E

If possible, the new value should be active immediately without reset.


Service menu INSTALL Mfa/mfb 

:ok  SERVICE XXXXX figure 104 (3)

3.9.4

Refresh the backup when exiting the service menu.

Optic Parameters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



figure 105 After laser change: Please insert the optic Module floppy and press

Service menu INSTALL Laser factor  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 106 (1)


copying ...

Service menu INSTALL Laser factor   SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E


Service menu INSTALL Laser factor 

:ok  SERVICE XXXXX figure 108 You introduced a new component in the optical Path A new calibration is necessary Press

to calibrate...

Service menu INSTALL Laser factor 


figure 109

3.9.5

Scanner Parameters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



figure 110 After scanner replacement: Please insert the scanner floppy and press

Service menu INSTALL Scanner  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 111






DD+DIS219.06E

(1)


copying ...

Service menu INSTALL Scanner   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 112


Service menu INSTALL Scanner  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 113 You introduced a new component in the optical path. A new calibration is necessary. Press

to calibrate...

Service menu INSTALL Scanner 


figure 114 (2)

Press

to go the calibration menu.






DD+DIS219.06E 3.9.6

CPF File (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select this menu to copy the CPF file from floppy to hard disk. •

overwrites the existing file

•

the concerning file name is displayed during the copy process

•

refers to the "configure local network ID" - screen



figure 115

Please insert the CPF-floppy and press

Service menu INSTALL CPF-file  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 116

copying ...

Service menu INSTALL CPF-file   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 117


Service menu COPY CPF-file 







DD+DIS219.06E

(2)

Press

to check if image queue is empty:

If the queue is not empty:

Image queue not empty! Check the queue then restart ”CONFIGURE Local network-ID” Press

to continue...

Service menu INSTALL CPF-file  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 119 If the queue is empty:

Confirm ID or CR250xxxxxxx1 CR250xxxxxxx2 CR250xxxxxxx3 CR250xxxxxxx4 CR250xxxxxxx5 CR250xxxxxxx6 CR250xxxxxxx7

select new .....201 .....202 .....203 .....204 .....205 .....206 .....207

Service menu CONFIGURE Local net ID  :cancel :ok ↑↓:more  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 120 •

the name CR250xxxxxxx1 is the AE-title of the digitizer

•

the current valid network ID is highlighted

•

ok- initializes the new settings

If the cpf file is corrupted, it is rejected by the digitizer and following message appears:

CPF-File is corrupted. Repeat with a correct one.

Service menu CONFIGURE Local net ID 


figure 121 (3)

Press

to go back to the installation menu.






DD+DIS219.06E

(4)

After activation of the new CPF a new backup is requested. Press to go to “Save machine specific data”.

Parameters have changed. You should refresh your Backup now. Please insert the backup Floppy and press

Service menu CONFIGURE  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 122

3.9.7

Language Files (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select this menu to copy the language files from floppy to hard disk. •

the concerning file names are displayed during the copy process

•

branches to the "configure user terminal language" - screen

•

request to save changes when exiting service



figure 123

Please insert the language floppy C25_2007 and press

Service menu INSTALL Language files  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 124 •

it is checked whether the language floppy is compatible with the current software version

•

if the language floppy does not fit, a warning is displayed DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.





DD+DIS219.06E

copying... A: to C:

Service menu INSTALL Language files   SERVICE XXXXX

figure 125



figure 126

Do you want me to change my user terminal language?


figure 127 (2)

If yes, go to menu "Configure user terminal language".






DD+DIS219.06E 3.9.8

HW Modification ID (1)

Select this menu to read the modification ID (service part no.) from floppy.

(2)

Check if modification ID on the floppy label is the same as the modification ID of the new part.

(3)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

•

the HW mod. ID with its description is displayed on the screen

•

the modification ID and description are automatically stored in the info counter under ”hardware modification history”

•

one floppy can contain several modification IDs

Save changes when exiting the menu.



figure 128 Example: Did you mount...? CM+9 5155 xxxx 2 IP transport Press

to confirm

Service menu INSTALL HW modific.  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 129






DD+DIS219.06E

3.10

CONFIGURE Selection of local station name or user terminal language. Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



figure 130 3.10.1

Local Network ID (1)

Select this menu to get a list of possible station names (out of the CPF).

(2)

Select desired name using

(3)

Press

(4)


1 2 3 4

-keys.

to initialize the new name.

Local network ID User terminal language Active Alert System Direct ID


figure 131 Select from list CR250xxxxxxx1 .....201 CR250xxxxxxx2 .....202 CR250xxxxxxx3 .....203 CR250xxxxxxx4 .....204 CR250xxxxxxx5 .....205 CR250xxxxxxx6 .....206 CR250xxxxxxx7 .....207

Service menu CONFIGURE Local net ID  :cancel :ok ↑↓:more  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 132 The name CR250xxxxxxx1 is the AE-title of the digitizer DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.





DD+DIS219.06E

(5)

Press

to go back to the menu “configure”.

(6)

Press

to save settings and go back to the menu “configure”.

(7)

After confirmation with OK the screen to refresh the backup appears. Press to go to menu “Save machine specific data”.

Parameters have changed. You should refresh your backup now. Please insert the backup floppy and press


figure 133 3.10.2

User Terminal Language (1)

Select this menu to get a list of selectable languages. Note, only HD resident language files can be selectable.

(2)

Select the desired language using the

(3)

Press

(4)


1 2 3 4

-keys.

to initialize the new name.



figure 134 Select from list: Dutch English (default) French German Italian Dutch Spanish

Service menu CONFIGURE Language  :cancel :ok ↑↓:more  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 135 (5)

Press

to go back to the menu “configure”.

(6)

Press

to save settings and go back to the menu “configure”.






DD+DIS219.06E (7)

After confirmation with OK the screen to refresh the backup appears. Press to go to menu “Save machine specific data”.

Parameters have changed. You should refresh your backup now. Please insert the backup floppy and press


figure 136 NOTE:

3.10.3

•

Only the main language is displayed.

•

No distinction between regional language differences, e.g. German for Austria, English for Australia is made.

Active Alert System The alert system is able to monitor the status of the device. If certain thresholds are reached a message (e-mail) is sent to a specified destination. The alert system is used for preventive maintenance. (1)

.Switch on/off the mechanism.

(2)

Configure destination.

1 2 3 4



figure 137 (3)

Select the Active Alert System...

1 Alert system status 2 Alert destination 3 Send test alert

Service menu CONFIGURE Alert System  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX






DD+DIS219.06E 3.10.4

Alert System Status 1 Alert system status 2 Alert destination 3 Send test alert


figure 139 Alert system status disable Change status with Alert destination: 10.6.5.152 Alert sent: 0

:


figure 140

3.10.5

Alert Destination 1 Alert system status 2 Alert destination 3 Send test alert


figure 141 Current alert destination: 010.006.005.152 change digit: ↑ ↓ change position:


figure 142 NOTE: The IP address of the alert destination (mail host) can be entered manually with the arrow keys. Only valid addresses (< 255) are accepted.






DD+DIS219.06E

3.10.6

Send Test Alert 1 Alert system status 2 Alert destination 3 Send test alert

Service menu Configure Alert system  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 143 The function sends a predefined test email to the configured destination. A successful delivery is confirmed with a message and a double beep. Sending test alert to 192.9.200.250 Email successfully sent

Service menu Configure Alert system 


figure 144 In case the destination is not reachable the following message comes up with a long beep: Sending test alert to 192.9.200.250 Email delivery failure

Service menu Configure Alert system 


figure 145






DD+DIS219.06E 3.10.7

Set up Direct ID 1 2 3 4



figure 146 (1)

Select Direct-ID “direct ID off” or the ID-viewer you want to be connected to.

Select from list: ID-viewer1-192.9.200.202 ID-viewer2-192.9.200.203 ID-viewer3-192.9.200.204

Service menu Configure  :cancel :ok ↑↓:more  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 147

3.10.8

Add-on Application (1)

Select this menu to enable/disable add-on applications for the digitizer. A list of possible add-on applications will be offered.

(2)

Select the desired add-on application using the

-keys.

(3) (4)

1 2 3 4

Refresh backup when exiting the menu.

Local network ID User terminal language Alert system Add-on applications

Service menu Configure  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 148






DD+DIS219.06E

Select from list: 1 Mammography (50µm)

Service menu Configure Application  :cancel :ok | ↓:more  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 149 (5)

The second line displays the selected Add-on application. Enable/disable mentioned add-application with the keys.

(6)

Press

to initialize the add-on application.

(7)

Press

to jump back to the prior screen without saving.

This screen has to be built for each add-on application Status of Selected application enabled Change status with

:

Service menu Configure Application  :cancel :ok |  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 150

3.11

(8)

Press

to save changes and exit menu.

(9)

Press

to jump back to the prior screen without saving.

CHECKS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



figure 151 (1)

Press

to go back to next higher level (service menu).

(2)

Press

to go to the next screen.






DD+DIS219.06E

3.11.1

System Check The system check is a non interactive test that lists the current status of the digitizer (voltages, stepper motor connections, light barrier status, nodes ...). The result of this list is stored in a file on the hard disk of the digitizer. 1 System check 2 Send image

Service menu Checks  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 152

3.11.2

(1)

Press


(2)

Press

to start system check.

Send Image (1)

Select this menu to send images from the hard disk to the processing station.

1 System check 2 Send image

Service menu Checks  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 153 (2)

Press


(3)

Press

to go to the next screen.






DD+DIS219.06E 3.11.2.1

Test Image (mosaic) (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to send the test image to the processing station.

Test image (mosaic) Flatfield calibration Flatfield banding Test sheet (jitter) Blue LED test image Mammo test image 1 Mammo test image 2

Service menu Checks Send image  :cancel :ok  SERVICE XXXXX

figure 154

3.11.2.2

(2)

Press


(3)

Press

to send test images.

Flatfield (calibration) (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to send the flatfield (calibration) to the processing station.



figure 155 (2)

Press


(3)

Press

to send flatfield.






DD+DIS219.06E 3.11.2.3

Flatfield (banding) (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to send the flatfield (banding) to the processing station.



figure 156

3.11.2.4

(2)

Press


(3)

Press

to send flatfield.

Test Sheet (jitter) (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to send the test sheet (jitter) to the processing station.



figure 157 (2)

Press


(3)

Press

to send test images.






DD+DIS219.06E 3.11.2.5

Blue LED Test Image (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to send the blue LED test image to the processing station.



figure 158

3.11.2.6

(2)

Press


(3)

Press

to send blue LED test image.

Mammo Test Image 1 (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to send the Mammo test image 1 to the processing station.



figure 159 (2)

Press


(3)

Press

to send Mammo test image 1.






DD+DIS219.06E 3.11.2.7

Mammo Test Image 2 (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select this menu to send the Mammo test image 2 to the processing station.



figure 160 (2)

Press


(3)

Press

to send Mammo test image 2.





Chapter 3.3

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Troubleshooting


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document describes how to locate errors and make checks by means of the Service menu of the Digitizer.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Service Bulletin

Title




Document Node ID: 12402235 eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v02


Repair and Service Troubleshooting

DD+DIS219.06E



(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

GENERAL PROCEDURE.........................................................................................................4 1.1

Show Error ................................................................................................................................5

1.2

Checks ......................................................................................................................................6






DD+DIS219.06E

1

General Procedure

Error occurrs

Error code is displayed

Select Function see 1.1

Select see 1.2

Error is located

Corrective Measures

5155_reg3.3_001.cdr

figure 1

NOTE: Additionally check Infocounter: see Chapter 9, Maintenance, "How to evaluate the infocounter" Evaluate diagnostic images for deficiencies (e.g. jitter)






DD+DIS219.06E

1.1

Show Error (1)

Enter the Service menu

(2)

Select 4 Show error 1 Explain error code

(3)

Select in error code history corresponding entry

Code

Occurred last

22570 20605

04-Feb-99 15:45 09-Jan-99 11:32

Service menu Show error : cancel : ok

5155_reg3.3_002.cdr

figure 2

(4)

Reason, meaning and cure of error are listed

22570 detected Reason: Cassette module 1. Power supply test of stepper node roll failed Meaning: No Power supply on stepper node

Service menu Show error Explain code : cancel : scroll

5155_reg3.3_003.cdr

figure 3 Service menu Show error Explain code

22570 detected - Power supply not connected - Fuse blown - Power supply defective

: cancel : scroll

5155_reg3.3_004.cdr

figure 4

(5)

Carry out the checks listed at cure. To verify that error is not sporadic, also a quick check can be carried out.

22570 detected Cure: - Check cables and connectors - Check replace fuse - Check replace power supply

Service menu Show error Explain code : cancel : scroll

5155_reg3.3_005.cdr

figure 5






DD+DIS219.06E

1.2

Checks (1)

Enter the Service menu

(2)

Select 8 Checks 1 System check

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

System check Check laser Check destinations Check disk Send flatfield Send jitter pattern Check I/O-bus Send Mammo Testimage

Service menu Checks : cancel : ok

5156_reg3.3_006.cdr

figure 6

(3)

System check is starting. All actions are executed in same order as during normal operation.

(4)

The file Snapshot.txt is generated on partition d:\ which informs you about the status of the machine. You can use e.g. notepad to view it.

NOTE: As an alternative, you can connect your Service PC to the serial port and enter "diag" at the prompt to start the diagnostic tool.





Chapter 3.4

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document describes Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses and LEDs of the Digitizer.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin




Document Node ID: 12403682 eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v02


Repair and Service Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs

DD+DIS219.06E



(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

CODING OF THE STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARDS ..................................................4

2

I/O-BUS ADDRESSES OF BOARDS .......................................................................................5

3

JUMPER CONFIGURATION OF THE HARD DISK .................................................................5 3.1

SCSI Hard Disk .........................................................................................................................5

4

FUSES OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................6

5

OVERVIEW OF DIAGNOSTIC LEDS.......................................................................................6






DD+DIS219.06E

1

Coding of the Stepper Motor Control Boards GS IOB-SIN-STEP Boards: CM+9 9499 8140 x GS

Designation

IO-Bus Address

Switch

410

Scan Unit – Scan rolls lift board

37H

JL1

Jumper Settings JL1 1

8

JLGS410.cdr

ST 10

2A 4A ST10 ST10_2.cdr

412

Scan Unit – Slowscan board 36H

JL1

JL1 1

8

JLGS412.cdr

ST 10


602

IP Transport Unit – IP transport board

27H

JL1

JL1 1

8

JLGS602.cdr

ST 10


712

Cassette Unit – IP alignment board

26H

JL1

JL1 1

8

JLGS712.cdr

ST 10


GS IOB-SIN-5Step Board: CM+9 9499 8120 x GS

Designation

IO-Bus Address

Switch

710

Cassette Unit –

22H

JL1

5fold-stepper motor board

Jumper Settings JL1 1

8

JLGS710_1.cdr

21H

JL 2

JL2 8

1

JLGS710_2.cdr






DD+DIS219.06E

2

I/O-Bus Addresses of Boards IO-Bus Address

GS

Board

21

710

Cassette unit (JL2) – 5fold stepper motor board

22

710

Cassette unit (JL1) – 5fold stepper motor board

26

712

Cassette unit – IP alignment board

27

602

IP Transport Unit – IP transport board

36

412

Scan Unit – Slowscan board

37

410

Scan Unit – Scan rolls lift board

70

230


75

210

Erasure control board

85

116

Emergency-node

80

306

cPCI adapter board

3

Jumper Configuration of the Hard Disk

3.1

SCSI Hard Disk Two equally designed SCSI hard disks are used. They only differ in the configuration of their jumper settings. SCSI-hard disk Quantum Atlas IV, V, 10KII Remove all jumpers

SCSI-hard disk IBM Ultrastar (DDYST09170, IC35L009UWD)

figure 1

correct jumper configuration at jumper 6 jumper block: figure 2






DD+DIS219.06E

4

Fuses Overview Ass.

Location

Fuse

Quality

Protection

200

Power unit

SI 201

T 2.0A

GS300

200

Stepper motor transformer

SI202

T 2.0A

TR206

200


SI 1

T 2.5A

GS410

SI 2

T 2.5A

GS602

SI 3

T 2.5A

GS712

SI 4

T 2.5A

GS412

SI 5

T 6.25A

GS710

NOTE: All fuses are slowblow fuses.

5

Overview of Diagnostic LEDs Ass.

Location

LED

Indicates

200


D9, green

SI 4 is OK.

D9, yellow

SI 3 is OK.

D9, red

SI 5 is OK.

D10, green

SI 2 is OK.

D10, yellow

SI 1 is OK.

D10, red

+5 V voltage is OK.

D11, green

(not used)

D11, yellow

(not used)

D11, red

+24 V voltage is OK.

GS306, voltage indicators (3 x 3 LEDs)

The voltage at corresponding position (see labeling) is OK.

GS312, Ethernet and FPGA indicators (2 x 3 LEDs)

Indicate the signaling related to software (service connector side) and hardware (RESET switch side).

300

cPCI Rack





Chapter 3.5

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Replacements / Repair Procedures


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document describes replacements relevant for the Field Service Engineer.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin




Document Node ID: 12401812 eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v02


Repair and Service Replacements / Repair Procedures

DD+DIS219.06E



(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................5

2

SAFETY NOTE.........................................................................................................................5

3

REMOVAL OF PANELS ...........................................................................................................6

4

REPLACEMENTS AT TRANSPORT UNIT ..............................................................................7

5

6

7

4.1

Removing Transport Unit from Digitizer....................................................................................7

4.2

Replacing Vacuum Unit ............................................................................................................8

4.3

Replacing Suction Cups............................................................................................................9

4.4

Replacing Stepper Motor Board................................................................................................9

4.5

Remounting Transport Unit.....................................................................................................10

REPLACEMENTS AT ERASURE UNIT .................................................................................11 5.1

Removing Erasure Unit from Digitizer ....................................................................................11

5.2

Replacing Erasure Lamps.......................................................................................................12

5.3

Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer .....................................................................................13

REPLACEMENTS AT POWER UNIT.....................................................................................14 6.1

Removing Power Unit from Digitizer .......................................................................................14

6.2

Removing Power Integration Board........................................................................................17

6.3

Installing new Power Integration Board ..................................................................................18

6.4

Removing 24 V Power Supply ................................................................................................19

6.5

Replacing Erasure Control Board ...........................................................................................20

REPLACEMENTS AT CASSETTE UNIT ...............................................................................22 7.1

Removing Cassette Unit from Digitizer...................................................................................22

7.2

Replacing 5-fold Stepper Motor Board ...................................................................................25

7.3

Replacing Stepper Motor Board..............................................................................................26

7.4

Replacing Cassette Opener Mechanism ................................................................................27





DD+DIS219.06E

8

9

10


REPLACEMENTS AT SCAN UNIT ........................................................................................31 8.1

Safety Note .............................................................................................................................31

8.2

Replacing the Optic Module....................................................................................................32

8.3

Putting the new Optic Module in Operation ............................................................................34

8.4

Replacing Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector...............................................35

8.5

Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation..........................................................................38

8.6

Removing Scan Unit from Digitizer .........................................................................................38

8.7

Replacing Pin Diode Board.....................................................................................................44

REPLACEMENTS AT THE CPCI-RACK................................................................................48 9.1

Replacing the Hard Disk .........................................................................................................48

9.2

Start up of a new Hard Disk ....................................................................................................50

REPLACEMENTS AT THE FRAME .......................................................................................52 10.1

Replacing the Display .............................................................................................................52

10.2

Replacing the Emergency Node Board ..................................................................................53

10.3

Removing the Erasure Unit Fan..............................................................................................53

10.4

Installing new Erasure Unit Fan ..............................................................................................56






DD+DIS219.06E

1

Introduction CR 35-X 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 make use of parts employing machine-specific parameters. These are: •

Laser

•

Photomultiplier

•

Pin-Diodes.

The corresponding spare parts kits comprise the new spare part as well as a floppy disk containing necessary parameters/values/data. The floppy disks are assigned clearly to the spare part and cannot be mistaken. After the new part has been installed, you have to load these parameters from floppy drive via service menu of the user terminal. Finally, you are asked to renew the backup. (See detailed description in the replacement section of this chapter.) Together with date and counter stamp the serial number of the exchanged part is automatically registered in the info counter file under the item “hardware modification history”.

2

Safety Note

CAUTION: Danger of cutting! Due to changed production methods, all parts of metal frame can be sharp-edged. Take special care when servicing the interior of the digitizer






DD+DIS219.06E

3

Removal of Panels 1

2

4

3 4

5

figure1

5156_reg3.5_001.cdr

1

Cover: Open two screws (Philips screw driver, medium size) and remove cover.

2

Left Side Panel: Open two screws (screw driver, medium size) and lift side panel off.

3

Right side panel: Press two latches and lift side panel off.

4

Top Front Panel: Loosen six Phillips screws and lift front panel off (the cover has to be removed before).

5

Bottom Front Panel: Press two latches to open the door.






DD+DIS219.06E

4

Replacements at Transport Unit

4.1

Removing Transport Unit from Digitizer (3)

Unplug digitizer from the mains.

(4)

Remove right side panel.

(5)

Disconnect plugs (1) and (2).

(6)

Untie the four fasteners (3).

(7)

Remove complete transport unit from digitizer and put it down.

figure 2

5156_reg3.5_002.jpg

figure 3

5156_reg3.5_003.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

4.2

Replacing Vacuum Unit Socket wrench (5.5 mm) (1)

To prevent from loosing screws in the digitizer, first take out complete transport unit from digitizer.

(2)

Unplug two hoses, including plastic angles, from suction cups (1).

(3)

Unplug 4-pin and 5-pin plugs.

(4)

Unscrew three screws (2) to loosen vacuum unit

(5)

(6)

figure 4

5156_reg3.5_004.jpg

figure 5

5156_reg3.5_005.jpg

figure 6

5156_reg3.5_006.jpg

Take out complete vacuum unit.

Check if there are dust caps on the new spare part and remove all of them.

(7)

Install new vacuum unit in reverse order.

(8)

Be aware of guide slot at suctions cups, to plug plastic angles in correct position.






DD+DIS219.06E

4.3

Replacing Suction Cups Socket wrench (5.5 mm)

4.4

(1)

To prevent from loosing screws in the digitizer, first take out complete transport unit from digitizer.

(2)

Unplug hose, including plastic angle, from metal bolt of suction cup.

(3)

Unscrew mounting screw.

(4)

Turn metal bolt of suction cup about 90° by hand and take out suction cup.

(5)

Install new suction cup in reverse order.

figure 7

5156_reg3.5_007.jpg

figure 8

5156_reg3.5_008.jpg

Replacing Stepper Motor Board (1)

For replacing stepper motor board, take out complete transport unit from digitizer.

(2)

Place transport unit stable and protect against tilting.

(3)

Move transport robot upwards.

(4)

Unplug both cables.

(5)

Press out plastic pins from metal plate side and remove stepper motor board.

(6)

Take out plastic pins from old stepper motor board and attach them on the new one.

(7)

Install new stepper motor board in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

4.5

Remounting Transport Unit NOTE: Before remounting transport unit in digitizer check that cassette opener of cassette unit is in hidden position. Otherwise a conflict with suction cups may appear.

(1)

Remount transport unit.

(2)

Tie the four fasteners.

(3)

Plug in the two cables and check that power supply cable cannot be clamped with side panel.

figure 9

5156_reg3.5_009.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

5

Replacements at Erasure Unit

5.1

Removing Erasure Unit from Digitizer (1)

Unplug the machine from the mains.

(2)

Open front door.

(3)

Push lock (1) downwards.

(4)

Pull out erasure unit to have easy access to the cable.

(5)

Unplug cable of erasure unit.

(6)

figure 10

5156_reg3.5_010.jpg

figure 11

5156_reg3.5_011.jpg

figure 12

5156_reg3.5_012.jpg

Pull the erasure unit cautiously out of the rail.






DD+DIS219.06E

5.2

Replacing Erasure Lamps

(1)

Open the two latches beside the glass.

(2)

Swing up the glass covering the lamps.

figure 13

5156_reg3.5_013.jpg

NOTE: Always replace all 10 lamps at the same time! Pull the lamps carefully out of their sockets.

NOTE: The glass bulb of the new lamps must be clean. Use a soft cloth, do not touch with bare fingers.

(3)

Insert the new lamps carefully in their sockets.

(4)

Close glass covering and the two latches.






DD+DIS219.06E

5.3

Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer (1)

Put erasure unit carefully on the rail and move it into the digitizer.

(2)

Connect cable of erasure unit.

NOTE: When re-inserting erasure unit, make sure that lock engages again.






DD+DIS219.06E

6

Replacements at Power Unit

6.1

Removing Power Unit from Digitizer Socket wrench (5.5 mm, 7 mm) (1)

Switch off digitizer and unplug mains cable on the rear side.

(2)

Open the front door.

(3)

Loosen two screws at the frame (7 mm socket wrench).

figure 14

5156_reg3.5_014.jpg

figure 15

5156_reg3.5_015.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

(4)

Unplug two cables on right hand side.

(5)

Pull out power unit maximum 2 cm out of the digitizer.

figure 16 (6)

5156_reg3.5_016.jpg

Remove metal plate, see circles (5.5 mm socket wrench), where four cable clamps are mounted.

figure 17

5156_reg3.5_017.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

(7)

Mark similar cables before disconnecting. They could be mistaken afterwards as only length difference could help.

(8)

Disconnect all plugs.

figure 18

5156_reg3.5_018.jpg

NOTE: Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug. Never pull at the cable itself!

(9)

Remove power unit carefully from digitizer.

figure 19

5156_reg3.5_019.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

6.2

Removing Power Integration Board (1)

1

Loosen three screws (socket wrench 5.5 mm) (1).

figure 20 (2)

5156_dis368.05_001.cdr

Unscrew (1, four screws) and unplug (2) power supply (A) to get easy access to plugs of the power integration board.

2

A 1 figure 21 (3)

Pinch three plastic pins (1) and push out of metal plate.

(4)

Unplug five cables off the power integration board and remove it.

5156_dis368.05_002.cdr

1

figure 22

5156_reg3.5_024.cdr






DD+DIS219.06E

6.3

Installing new Power Integration Board NOTE: Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.

(1)

Establish which type of erasure unit fan is installed. Note: The new fan (CM+9 5146 3620 0) has the type designation "RG 12519/14N/2" on its label.

(2)

Set the jumpers on the power integration board depending on the fan type (see figure 23). For the new fan, set jumpers to the upper two pins at ST7 and ST8. For the old fan, set jumpers to the lower two pins at ST7 and ST8.

figure 23

5156_dis073.05_001.cdr

(3)

Install new power integration board in reverse order (see sections 6.2 and 6.1).

(4)

Connect digitizer to the mains.

(5)

Switch on the digitizer and wait for successful completion of the self test.






DD+DIS219.06E

6.4

Removing 24 V Power Supply Small screw driver, socket wrench (5.5 mm) (1)

Unplug two cables (1).

(2)

Unscrew two screws at power supply of power unit, one at each side (5.5 mm socket wrench).

(3)

Take out power supply.

(4)

figure 24

5156_reg3.5_020.jpg

figure 25

5156_reg3.5_021.jpg

Install new power supply in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

6.5

Replacing Erasure Control Board Socket wrench (5.5 mm) (1)

For replacing erasure control board take out power unit from digitizer.

(2)

Unplug connections to transformers.

(3)

(4)

figure 26

5156_reg3.5_025.jpg

figure 27

5156_reg3.5_026.jpg

figure 28

5156_reg3.5_027.jpg

Unplug three cables at left side.

Unscrew three screws (1) at metal plate.






DD+DIS219.06E

(5)

Turn board and unplug cables at right side.

(6)

If new board was delivered without metal plate, remove this from old board and mount it to new one.

figure 29

5156_reg3.5_028.jpg

Install new erasure control board in reverse order.

(7)

(8)

Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.






DD+DIS219.06E

7

Replacements at Cassette Unit NOTE: For all actions at cassette unit, first remove transport unit.

7.1

Removing Cassette Unit from Digitizer Phillips screwdriver, socket wrench (7 mm) (1)

Loosen the screws (1) on the rear side of digitizer.

(2)

Push back top cover a little.

(3)

Remove both side panels.

(4)

figure 30

5156_reg3.5_029.jpg

figure 31

5156_reg3.5_030.jpg

Open front door.






DD+DIS219.06E

(5)

Loosen six screws 1, three at each side, at front cover.

(6)

Remove the front cover.

(7)

(8)

figure 32

5156_reg3.5_031.jpg

figure 33

5156_reg3.5_032.jpg

figure 34

5156_reg3.5_033.jpg

Disconnect cables of cassette unit. Two of them can only be reached from the front.

Loosen screw with a socket wrench (5.5 mm) to unfasten energy chain from frame.






DD+DIS219.06E

(9)

Loosen three screws 1 of spindle carriage with socket wrench (7 mm) for about two turns.

figure 35

5156_reg3.5_034.jpg

figure 36

5156_reg3.5_035.jpg

figure 37

5156_reg3.5_036.jpg

(10) Turn spindle carriage off the thread. Mind that it is a left-handed thread.

(11) Move up IP transport robot by means of red handle.






DD+DIS219.06E

(12) Pull out cassette unit cautiously with a straight movement, as bearings do not guide all along. Mind position of the hands as shown beside. Put cassette unit down.

figure 38

5156_reg3.5_037.jpg

(13) Reinstall in reverse order. When reinserting, do not cant bearings and do not push in with force.

7.2

Replacing 5-fold Stepper Motor Board Socket wrench (5.5 mm) (1)

Unplug all cables, if necessary unscrew cable clamps.

(2)

Push plastic clips and take board off the pins.

figure 39

5156_reg3.5_038.jpg

Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.

(3)

Install new board in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

7.3

Replacing Stepper Motor Board Socket wrench (5.5 mm), pliers (1)

Unscrew energy chain to have free access to stepper motor board.

(2)

Unplug all cables.

(3)

(4)

figure 40

5156_reg3.5_039.jpg

figure 41

5156_reg3.5_040.jpg

Take board off the plastic pins, if necessary by means of a pliers.

Install new board in reverse order. Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.






DD+DIS219.06E

7.4

Replacing Cassette Opener Mechanism NOTE: If the light barrier flag of the cassette opener is broken then you need not replace the complete cassette opener mechanism. The light barrier flag is a separately available spare part. Order number: CM+9 5146 .5911 x. The light barrier flag can brake when it touches the frame of cassette opener while it is moved down.

figure 42

5156_reg3.5_041.jcdr

Screw driver, socket wrench (7 mm) (1)

For replacing cassette opener mechanism first take out complete cassette unit from digitizer.

(2)

Remove spring washers at both sides of shaft. Pay attention that shaft is not scratched during replacement as it touches IP directly in normal operation.

figure 43

5156_reg3.5_042.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

(3)

(4)

Remove deflector plate by unscrewing three screws by a socket wrench (7 mm).

figure 44

5156_reg3.5_043jpg

figure 45

5156_reg3.5_044.jpg

figure 46

5156_reg3.5_045.jpg

Remove I/O slot opener by unscrewing two screws by a socket wrench (7 mm).






DD+DIS219.06E

(5)

(6)

Remove light barrier mount by unscrewing two adjoining screws by a socket wrench (7 mm).

figure 47

5156_reg3.5_046.jpg

figure 48

5156_reg3.5_047.jpg

figure 49

5156_reg3.5_048.jpg

Remove black plastic frame of opener by unscrewing four screws, two on both sides, by a socket wrench (7 mm).

(7)

Remove spring washer at right side of shaft.

(8)

Push black plastic crank carefully to right side. It can be moved by red handle to loosen contact to shaft.






DD+DIS219.06E

(9)

Remove alignment plate by means of a Phillips screwdriver.

figure 50

5156_reg3.5_049.jpg

(10) Turn complete cassette unit and swing up 5fold stepper motor board to have access to the rear side. (11) Unplug connector to cassette detection switch (ST 8) at 5fold stepper motor board of cassette unit. (12) Unscrew two nuts at rear side which mount cassette opener.

figure 51

5156_reg3.5_050.jpg

figure 52

5156_reg3.5_051.jpg

(13) Take out toothed belt and remove cassette opener.

(14) Install new cassette opener in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

8

Replacements at Scan Unit

8.1

Safety Note WARNING: Risk of electric shock! Make sure that the digitizer is switched off, before you remove the optic module.

There are no serviceable parts inside the optical module. Do not open sealed parts of the optical module.

figure 53

5156_reg3.5_089.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

8.2

Replacing the Optic Module CAUTION: Risk of injury when removing the scan unit! To remove the scan unit safely, use the digitizer ramp. Check that both adjustable feet are touching the ground before removal of the scan unit.

Allen key (4 mm), socket wrench (5.5 mm), (1)

Unplug activation plug of the optic module (Sub-D plug, 25 pins).

5158_reg3.5_001.cdr

figure 54 (2)

Undo the shielding clamp (A), (5.5 mm socket wrench). Unplug the polygon plug (B) (the connection is unmistakable).

A

B

5158_reg3.5_002.cdr

figure 55






DD+DIS219.06E

(3)

For easier handling, unplug flat cable on left side of PMM.

5158_reg3.5_006.cdr

figure 56 (4)

Loosen four Allen screws (4 mm).

5158_reg3.5_003.cdr

figure 57 (5)

Pull out optic module cautiously by using the T-handle and one hand down left. The rails guide the optic module and avoid that the PMM is being damaged. However, take care to pull out the optic module straightforward.

5158_reg3.5_004.cdr

figure 58 (1)

Install the new optic module in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

8.3

Putting the new Optic Module in Operation (1)

Switch on the Digitizer.

(2)

Install the optics specific data from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service Menu at the user terminal.

(3)

Select <5 INSTALL from floppy> <4 Optics parameters>. The system requests: a. to compare the S/N on the optic module and the S/N stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the parameters are loaded. The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date and counter stamp b. to update the backup

. (4)

Make an IP center calibration (see chapter 3.6).

(5)

Make a shading calibration of all formats (see chapter 3.6)

(6)

Update the backup to save the calibration data.

(7)

Select <3 Save on floppy> <2 Machine specific data>

(8)

Follow the online instructions.

(9)

Enter the serial number of the Digitizer on the label of the optic modul floppy disk.

(10) Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test sheet), see chapter 3.6






DD+DIS219.06E

8.4

Replacing Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector CAUTION: Risk of damage! Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component. Allen key, 3 mm Socket wrench, 7 mm

(1)

Remove the optic module as described in section 8.2

(2)

Undo the Allen screw (3 mm) at the light well (right hand side).

(3)

Lift up the light well.

5158_reg3.5_005.cdr

figure 59 (4)

Unplug cable on left side of the PMM.

5158_reg3.5_006.cdr

figure 60






DD+DIS219.06E

(5)

Loosen the two knurled screws by pressing the blue foam.

5158_reg3.5_007.cdr

figure 61

(6)

Loosen the four Allen screws at the light collector (7 mm socket wrench)

5158_reg3.5_008.cdr

figure 62 (7)

Move the black aluminum plate at the far end of the light collector gently to and fro; this eases the removal

(8)

Tip over and pull out the PMM carefully.

5158_reg3.5_009.cdr

figure 63






DD+DIS219.06E

NOTE: Hold one hand to the PMM and the other to the light collector to avoid tearing apart the module.

5158_reg3.5_010.cdr

figure 64 (9)

Put down the PMM carefully.

(10) Install in reverse order.

NOTE: Check the functionality of the dust brush after the installation of the PMM!






DD+DIS219.06E

8.5

Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation (1)

Switch off the digitizer.

(2)

Install the mfa / mfb parameters from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service Menu at the user terminal.

(3)

Select <5 INSTALL from floppy> <3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)> The system requests: a. to compare the serial number on the photomultiplier module and the serial number stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the parameters are loaded. The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date and counter stamp b. to update the backup

8.6

(4)

Calibrate all formats, see chapter 3.6

(5)

Update the backup to save the calibration data

(6)

Select <3 Save on floppy> <2 Machine specific data>

(7)

Follow the on-line instructions

(8)

Enter the serial number of the Digitizer on the label of the photomultiplier floppy disk

(9)

Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test sheet), see chapter 3.6

Removing Scan Unit from Digitizer The following preparations have to be carried out: •

Disconnect mains cable.

•

Open front door.

•

Remove both side panels.

•

Remove IP-transport Unit.

•

Remove Erasure Unit.

•

Remove Optical Modul as descriebed in section 8.2

•

Remove the Photomultiplier with light collector 8.4






DD+DIS219.06E

Phillips screwdriver, Allen key (5 mm), socket wrench (5.5 mm), open-end wrench (13 mm) (1)

(2)

(3)

Tip over cPCI-Rack.

figure 65

5156_reg3.5_052.jpg

figure 66

5156_reg3.5_053.jpg

Loosen Allen screw (5 mm); there may be perceptible resistance due to Locktite saved connection.

Unscrew two screws (A) (openend wrench 13 mm) to loosen scan unit from frame.

A

5158_reg3.5_011.cdr

figure 67






DD+DIS219.06E

(4)

(5)

Pull out scan unit a little.

figure 68

5156_reg3.5_088.jpg

figure 69

5156_reg3.5_055.jpg

figure 70

5156_reg3.5_056.jpg

Remove grounding clamp (socket wrench 5.5 mm) at the right side of the boards.

(6)

Mark cables before disconnecting. They could be mistaken.

(7)

Disconnect all plugs (1) at both sides from boards.






DD+DIS219.06E

(8)

(9)

Loosen screw (socket wrench 5.5 mm) and unplug flat cable on left side of scan unit.

figure 71

5156_reg3.5_057.jpg

figure 72

5156_reg3.5_017.jpg

figure 73

5156_reg3.5_018.jpg

Remove metal plate, see circles (socket wrench 5.5 mm), where four cable clamps are mounted.

(10) Mark similar cables before disconnecting. They could be mistaken afterwards as only length difference could help. (11) Disconnect all plugs.






DD+DIS219.06E

NOTE: Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug. Never pull at the cable itself!

(12) Put cables over the front door to have easy access to the scan unit.

figure 74

5156_reg3.5_060.jpg

Wear safety shoes while removing scan unit.

(13) Push slightly to left side to avoid getting caught. (14) Pull out the scan unit a little.

figure 75

5156_reg3.5_061.jpg






DD+DIS219.06E

(15) Push slightly to right side to avoid canting of the rubber pad in the rail.

figure 76

5156_reg3.5_062.jpg

figure 77

5156_reg3.5_063.jpg

(16) To pull out the scan unit completely use hand hold on the left side.

(17) Bring scan unit on a safe place and take care that it can not tilt. (18) Install new scan unit in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

8.7

Replacing Pin Diode Board Socket wrench (5.5 mm), Open-end wrench (7 mm, 10 mm), Screw driver (1)

Unplug cables at pin diode board.

(2)

Mark position (1) of motor. The mark is necessary to reproduce belt tension afterwards.

(3)

Unscrew two screws (2) by socket wrench (5.5 mm), positioned under toothed belt.

(4)

(5)

figure 78

5156_reg3.5_070.jpg

figure 79

5156_reg3.5_071.jpg

figure 80

5156_reg3.5_072.jpg

Loosen two screws open-end wrench 10 mm, for moving motor.

Move motor from right to left and take away toothed belt. Afterwards take out complete metal angle with motor.






DD+DIS219.06E

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Remove spring washers on both sides of gear.

figure 81

5156_reg3.5_073.jpg

figure 82

5156_reg3.5_074.jpg

figure 83

5156_reg3.5_075.jpg

Unscrew two nuts at upper mounting open-end wrench 7 mm.

Move two bearings away from each other by means of a small screw driver.

Unscrew c-clips protection at scan roller and remove scan roller carefully.






DD+DIS219.06E

(10) Take out springs at aluminum bracket and bracket itself.

figure 84

5156_reg3.5_076.jpg

figure 85

5156_reg3.5_077.jpg

figure 86

5156_reg3.5_078.jpg

(11) Remove worm wheel. (12) Remove spring washers at both sides of drive shaft and take out drive shaft itself by moving backwards.

(13) Unplug connection to diode. (14) Unscrew two screws (socket wrench 5.5 mm), to dismount metal bracket.

(15) Move board to left side until it stops. (16) To take out the board you have to pass two screws on the right side. Therefore bend board very carefully, turn it into a horizontal position and take it out.






DD+DIS219.06E

(17) After reinserting the new pin diode board, make sure that board engages properly. (18) Push the board to the very right side, hold it in place and mount the metal bracket. Check that the board cannot move. (19) Connect plugs. Only plug for motor is connected later. (20) Insert drive shaft. Make sure that its ends engage in correct position and that light barrier flag is in functional position. (21) Mount aluminum angle and springs. (22) Mount motor and toothed belt. (23) Screw loose-fitting two 5.5 mm screws under belt. (24) Mount motor by two screws with open-end wrench 10 mm, at position marked before. (25) Check and resp. adjust tension of toothed belt by pressing moderate with two fingers. Distance should be approx. 1.5 cm (0.6 inch). (26) Fix screws under belt. figure 87

5156_reg3.5_079.jpg

(27) Wind cable around feed line of motor and connect plug of light barrier to motor.






DD+DIS219.06E

9

Replacements at the cPCI-Rack

9.1

Replacing the Hard Disk NOTE: In order to avoid any damage at the storage board, replace the hard disk very cautiously.

Phillips screwdriver, medium size (1)

Tip over cPCI-Rack.

(2)

Disconnect the white connector of the power supply from the storage board (1).

(3)

Loosen the two terminal rails (2).

(4)

Disconnect the ribbon cables (3) and (4) from floppy disk drive and hard disk.

figure 88

5156_reg3.5_080

figure 89

5156_reg3.5_081






DD+DIS219.06E

(1)

(2)

figure 90 shows the storage board with the inserted hard disk.

5156_reg3.5_082

figure 91

5156_reg3.5_083

figure 92

5156_reg3.5_084

Loosen four round-head screws at the rear of the storage board to separate the hard disk from the storage board.

(3)

Disconnect the connector of the power supply (circle) from the hard disk.

(4)

Remove the hard disk from the storage board.

(5)

figure 90

Install the new hard disk in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

9.2

Start up of a new Hard Disk Service PC

NOTE: The following floppies are needed for installation: • Hard disk formatter floppy • CR 35 Portex Installer Disk 2/2 • CR 35 Software Release Disk 1/3 • CR 35 Software Release Disk 2/3 • CR 35 Software Release Disk 3/3 Floppy Portex Installer 1/2 is not needed for this procedure. (1)

Disconnect the digitizer from the network.

(2)

Connect Service PC to service port and start a terminal program.

(3)

Take the Hard disk formatter floppy and insert it into the floppy disk drive of the digitizer.

(4)

Disconnect the digitizer from the network (since a default IP-Address & hostname is configured).

(5)

Connect Service PC with terminal program (e.g. Hyper Terminal) to RS232 port of CR35.

(6)

Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer.

(7)

Confirm partitioning/formatting of the hard disk with ‘y’.

(8)

Wait until you get the final message on a terminal connected to the service RS232 port or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off.

(9)

Insert the floppy ACP Portex Installer 2/2 into the disk drive of the digitizer.

(10) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer. (11) Wait until you get the final message on a terminal connected to the service RS232 port or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off. (12) Remove floppy (don't insert any other floppy). (13) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer. (14) Wait until you get the final message on a Terminal connected to the service RS232 port, or wait approximately 2 minutes. (15) Insert the floppy CR35 Software Release Disk 1/3 into the disk drive of the digitizer. (16) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer. (17) Wait until you get the final message on a terminal connected to the service RS232 port, or wait until control LED of floppy disk drive is off. (18) Proceed the same way with the CR35 Software Release Disk 2/3 and 3/3. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.





DD+DIS219.06E

(19) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer and wait until software is inflated completely. (20) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer. (21) Restore the machine-specific data. (22) Restore the CPF-file. (23) Press the Reset button on CPU-Board or turn power off/on at digitizer. (24) Write machine-specific data on floppy. (25) Reconnect network cable.

NOTE: Without restoring the device-specific parameters, operation is not possible.






DD+DIS219.06E

10

Replacements at the Frame

10.1

Replacing the Display Socket wrench (5.5 mm), Philips screw driver (1)

Remove cover.

(2)

Remove top front panel.

(3)

Unscrew four screws (5.5 mm).

(4)

Loosen screw (5.5 mm) at the right side of the display.

(5)

Unplug cable on the board.

(6)

figure 93

5156_reg3.5_085

figure 94

5156_reg3.5_086

Install the new display in reverse order.






DD+DIS219.06E

10.2

Replacing the Emergency Node Board Pliers, Philips screw driver (1)

Remove cover.

(2)

Remove top front panel.

(3)

Take board off the four plastic pins (1), if necessary by means of pliers.

(4)

Unplug flat cable (2).

figure 95 (5)

10.3

5156_reg3.5_087

Install the new emergency node board in reverse order.

Removing the Erasure Unit Fan (1)

Switch off digitizer and disconnect mains plug.

(2)

Open lower front door and remove both side panels.

(3)

Remove transport unit from digitizer (see section 4.1).

(4)

Tip over cPCI-Rack.

figure 96

5156_reg3.5_052






DD+DIS219.06E

(5)

Loosen Allen (5 mm) screw at front side; there may be perceptible resistance due to Locktite-saved connection.

(6)

Unscrew two Allen screws (5 mm) (1, see figure 98) at left side to loosen scan unit from frame.

(7)

Pull out scan unit by about 10 cm.

(8)

Remove screw (1, see figure 99) which fixes fan assembly (A) at right side.

(9)

Unplug fan assembly at left side.

figure 97

5156_reg3.5_053

figure 98

5156_reg3.5_054

A 1

figure 99

5156_dis369.05_001






DD+DIS219.06E

(10) Slide fan assembly (A) out of holder (1, see figure 100) and remove from device.

A

1 figure 100 (11) Unscrew 4 Allen screws (1) and unmount plug (2) to release fan.

5156_dis369.05

2

1 figure 101

5156_dis369.05






DD+DIS219.06E

10.4

Installing new Erasure Unit Fan NOTE: This erasure unit fan can only be used in combination with the power integration board with jumpers (CM+9 5156 6450 1).

(1)

Check if the power integration board with jumpers (CM+9 5156 6450 1) is installed (For the removal of the board from the digitizer, see section 6.2).

NOTE: The jumpers (see figure 102) must be set to the upper pins.

figure 102

5156_dis073.05_001.cdr

(2)

Check the jumper settings on the power integration board.

(3)

Proceed in reverse order to install new fan. See section 10.3.

(4)

Connect digitizer to the mains.

(5)

Switch on and wait for the successful completion of the self test.





Chapter 3.6

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Adjustments and Calibrations


CR 35-X Type 5158/100

CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document describes adjustments and calibration procedures for the digitizer.

►

►


Release Date

Changes compared to previous version 2.0

2.1

08-2008

•

Updated information on the IP-center calibration and the shading calibration. Details see section 2.2 and section 2.3.

•

Added calibration with mammography X-ray source. Details see section 2.2 and section 2.3.


Title

DD+DIS171.08E

CR 35-X Service Bulletin # 06: “Announcement of Digitizer Software C25_3007”


Edition 2, Revision 1 08-2008 printed in Germany Agfa Company Confidential

Document Node ID: 12403363 eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v06


Repair and Service Adjustments and Calibrations

DD+DIS219.06E

►

Manufacturer Agfa HealthCare N.V. Publisher Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH Tegernseer Landstraße 161 D - 81539 München Germany Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V. All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved. AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.



(2)


NOTE: To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.



CR 35-X - Type 5158/100 CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)


DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

1

2

3

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE SCANNER POSITION ..............................................4 1.1

Adjustment Procedure of the Scanner Position ........................................................................5

1.2

Verification for the Adjustment of the Scanner Position ...........................................................8

CALIBRATIONS .......................................................................................................................9 2.1

Possible Reasons for a Calibration...........................................................................................9

2.2

IP-Center Calibration ..............................................................................................................10

2.2.1

Erase the Cassette .................................................................................................................11

2.2.2

Expose the Cassette...............................................................................................................12

2.2.3

Start the IP-Center Calibration................................................................................................16

2.2.4

Failed IP-Center Calibration....................................................................................................17

2.3

Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................20

2.3.1

Erase the Cassette .................................................................................................................21

2.3.2

Expose the Cassette...............................................................................................................21

2.3.3

Start the Shading Calibration ..................................................................................................23

2.3.4

Failed Shading Calibration......................................................................................................30

2.4

Verification of the Calibration ..................................................................................................35

BACKUP .................................................................................................................................38






DD+DIS219.06E

1

Mechanical Adjustment of the Scanner Position REQUIRED TIME: Approximately 45 min.

IMPORTANT: This adjustment is critical! Perform it only if you are familiar with the adjustment procedure.

When?

Perform this adjustment if: •

Geometric or material properties of the clamping elements in general have been changed.

•

The scanner has been exchanged.

•

Frequent IP jams are present after the transport from the scan unit.

NOTE: Carry out this adjustment only with digitizers showing the above described problems frequently! PREREQUISITES/REQUIRED TOOLS: •

Open-end socket wrench, 13 mm

•

Floppy for storing the machine specific data






DD+DIS219.06E

1.1

Adjustment Procedure of the Scanner Position (1)

Get a 15 x 30 cm cassette or a 18 x 24 cm cassette.

(2)

Remove both side panels and bridge the interlock switch with a service key.

(3)

For adjusting the scanner, the fastening at the left side of the digitizer has to be modified (see circle in figure 1). Mark the fastening nut and the fastening plate with a permanent marker or a scriber. The mark makes it easier to count the turns of the nut.

figure 1

(4)

Turn the marked nut one complete turn counterclockwise, with the open-end socket wrench. The scanner tilts to the left side, with view from the input slot.

(5)

Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate, mounted on the thread of the clamper.

(6)

Switch on the digitizer.

(7)

Enter the service menu.

(8)

Select <2 MAINTENANCE> <3 Test cycle> <4 Handling cycle>.

(9)

Set number of cycles to 2 and start test cycle with the prepared cassette (see step (1)).

(10) Switch off the digitizer.






DD+DIS219.06E

(11) Repeat steps (4) to (10) until the image plate (IP) is no more or only partly sucked or transported into the cassette. (12) Loosen the nut behind the fastening plate. (13) Turn the marked nut one complete turn clockwise. (14) Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate. (15) Remove the IP by hand. If the IP is clamped turn the lift motor (M401) by hand counterclockwise to get the IP released. (16) Switch on the digitizer. (17) Enter the service menu. (18) Select <2 MAINTENANCE> <3 Test cycle> <4 Handling cycle>. (19) Set number of cycles to 2 and start test cycle with the prepared cassette (see step (1)). (20) Switch off the digitizer. (21) Loosen the nut behind the fastening plate. (22) Turn the marked nut one complete turn counterclockwise. (23) Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate. (24) Remove the IP by hand. If the IP is clamped turn the lift motor (M401) by hand counter-clockwise to get the IP released. (25) Switch on the digitizer. (26) Enter the service menu.






DD+DIS219.06E

(27) Select <2 MAINTENANCE> <3 Test cycle> <4 Handling cycle>. (28) Set number of cycles to 2 and start test cycle with the prepared cassette (see step (1)). (29) Switch off the digitizer. (30) Repeat steps (21) to (29) until the IP is sucked and transported into the cassette correctly. (31) Switch off the digitizer. (32) Loosen the nut behind the fastening plate. (33) Turn the marked nut one complete turn counter-clockwise. (34) Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate. (35) Switch on the digitizer. (36) Perform the verification (see section 1.2).






DD+DIS219.06E

1.2

Verification for the Adjustment of the Scanner Position NOTE: Avoid that direct sun light shines into the digitizer. (1)

Result

Properly observe, while performing a test cycle with a small cassette (18 x 24 cm or 15 x 30 cm), if: •

The IP performs a constant movement.

•

The IP is not jerking.

(2)

Perform more test cycles with the small cassette, if necessary.

(3)

Adjust the scanner position, if the IP is not sucked and transported correctly. Therefore proceed with step (4) of section 1.1.

(4)

Remove the service key at the interlock switch.

(5)

Mount both side panels.

The adjustment has been successful, if the IP is sucked and transported correctly.






DD+DIS219.06E

2

Calibrations NOTE: Make sure that the used IPs are dry, clean and do not have artifacts such as scratches or contamination.

2.1

Possible Reasons for a Calibration IMPORTANT: If an IP-center calibration is necessary, always perform a shading calibration afterwards.

Calibration

Details see

When

IP-Center Calibration •

Shading Calibration

The optic module has been exchanged.

•

The pin diode board (GS440) and/or the light barrier IR Receiver (GS446) have been replaced.

•

White borders on the Mammo diagnostic images are present.*

•

IP-Center Calibration has been performed.

•

The optic module has been exchanged.

•

The LISA module (photomultiplier with light collector) has been exchanged.

•

The scan unit has been replaced.

•

Unacceptable line artifacts (stripes) in slow scan direction are still visible on the diagnostic image after cleaning the scan area.

2.2

Approx. 30 min.

2.3

Approx. 1 h.

* only on 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm cassette formats. The white border is present only on one side of the image.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.2

IP-Center Calibration REQUIRED TIME: Approximately 60 min.

PREREQUISITES / REQUIRED TOOLS: •

X-ray source (GenRad recommended) If a GenRad X-ray source is available, this should be used for all applications: the GenRad, Mammo and Extremity. For a pure Mammo site use a Mammography X-ray source with the largest available bucky.

•

Cassette: o

GenRad (24 x 30 cm or smaller),

o

Mammo (18 x 24 cm): Always expose the smallest cassette format used in the hospital. If the cassette format 18 x 24 cm is not available, the calibration can also be performed with a 24 x 30 cm cassette.

•

For a GenRad X-ray source: Cu-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2

•

For a Mammography X-ray source: Al-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0

* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

NOTE: The GenRad X-ray source and the Mammography X-ray source require different prerequisites. Do not use GenRad X-ray source with Al-filter or Mammography X-ray source with Cu-filter! NOTE: For Mammography X-ray source, in order to fix the Al-filter below the collimation window, a reliable adhesive tape is necessary. Depending on the adhesive tape, a solvent may be required for the cleaning of the X-ray source. Make sure the tape is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.






DD+DIS219.06E

The IP-center calibration procedure consists of the following steps: How?

Procedure Erase cassette

2.2.1

Expose cassette

2.2.2

Start IP center calibration

2.2.3

Verification

2.2.1

Details see

2.4

Erase the Cassette (1)

on the Press the Erase key local keypad of the digitizer and the following screen appears:

BUSY ERASURE

WARNING The next cassette(s) will be erased Enter number of cassettes to erase: Put cassette in input buffer or press X to quit CR85B

1

5148_Chap03.6_039.cdr

figure 2

(2)

Place the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer.

(3)

Wait for the erased cassette at the output buffer.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.2.2

Expose the Cassette

2.2.2.1

Exposure of the Cassette for a GenRad X-ray source (1)

Place the cassette in length direction to the X-ray tube as shown in figure 3.

Rotating Anode

x-ray tube Cathode

51 48

_3

. 6.c dr

O.K.

Not O.K.

figure 3

(2)

Ensure that the entire image plate is fully exposed! The collimated field must be larger than the image plate!

figure 4

(3)

Place the Cu-filter below the collimation window.

(4)

Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 µGy: - 12 mAs, - 75 kV, - 1.3 m (51,2”) distance, - Large focus.

NOTE: Best use a dosimeter to measure the dose! (5)

Expose the cassette.

(6)

Turn the cassette 180°.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.2.2.2

(7)

Expose the cassette again. After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total with a dose of 20 µGy.

(8)

Remove the Cu-filter.

Exposure of the Cassette for a Mammography X-ray source NOTE: The exposure of the Mammo cassette with a Mammography X-ray source is only applicable for the Mammography IP-center calibration.

Goal

Expose at least the half of the cassette (tube side up), which lies opposite to the chestwall side, see figure 5. Exposed area (= 1/2 of cassette)

(chestwall side)

cassette (with tube side up)

figure 5

(1)

Remove the compression paddle.

(2)

Check that the appropriate window is selected according to the bucky size.

If both, the 18 x 24 cm and the 24 x 30 cm, buckies are available, the smallest cassette format (18 x 24 cm) has to be used with the largest bucky size (24 x 30 cm). For this purpose refer to column 1 of the following table. If only one bucky size is available (cassette format is then identical to the bucky size) refer to column 2 of the following table.






DD+DIS219.06E

(3)

(4)

(5)

Column 1:

Column 2:

Select the following exposure parameters:

Select the following exposure parameters:

- 20 mAs - 28 kV - Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo) - Large focus

- 2 x 10 mAs - 28 kV - Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo) - Large focus

Insert a dummy Mammography cassette in the bucky to activate the X-ray modality.

Insert a dummy Mammography cassette in the bucky to activate the X-ray modality.

Place the cassette on the bucky:

Place the cassette on the bucky:

- With tube side up - Horizontally centered

- With tube side up - With a slight offset in horizontal direction.

Move the cassette vertically towards the bucky chestwall, so that the rear half (opening side) of the cassette is in the middle of the collimation window.

Move the cassette vertically towards bucky chestwall, so that the rear half (opening side) of the cassette is in the collimation window. The marked area in figure 7 must be within the collimation window.

bucky

cassette 18 x 24 cm

collimation window

collimation window

cassette

bucky 24 x 30 cm (chestwall)

figure 7

figure 6

(6)

(chestwall)

Fix the Al-filter below the collimation window and make sure the tape is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.


(7)

Expose the cassette. Perform one single exposure! Rotation of cassette is not required.


(8)

n.a.

Remove the Al-filter.






DD+DIS219.06E

(9)

Column 1:

Column 2:

n.a.

Leave the cassette on the bucky with tube side up. Move the cassette horizontally to the other side of the bucky and vertically towards bucky chestwall, so that the rear half (opening side) of the cassette is in the collimation window. The marked area in figure 8 must be within the collimation window.

bucky collimation window

cassette (chestwall)

figure 8

(10)

n.a.


(11)

n.a.


(12)



(13)

Clean the X-ray source with a solvent. Clean the X-ray source with a solvent.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.2.3

Start the IP-Center Calibration NOTE: Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration. (1) Enter the Service menu. (2) Select <2 MAINTENANCE> <2 Calibration> <1 IP center calibration>. After the application has been chosen the exposure parameters for the cassette are shown on the display. These parameters are only valid for a GenRad X-ray source. If a Mammography X-ray source is used, refer to the exposure parameters in step (3) of section 2.2.2.2.

Exposure parameters: Service menu Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Maintenance 2 exposures a 10 microGy Calibration turn 180 degree (Approx. FFEDist 1.3 m, X :cancel 12 mAs, 75 kVp) Insert cassette 24x30 cm or smaller

5148_Chap03.6_008.cdr

figure 9

(3) Insert the exposed cassette in the digitizer. (4) In case the cassette has been identified by mistake the following screen will be displayed: - Press the escape key , if you want to scan the cassette: the name of the patient will be shown. - Press the confirm key , if you want to start the calibration.

Cassette is identified with patient data. Press to calibrate or X to scan.

Service menu Maintenance Calibration X

:cancel :ok 5148_Chap03.6_030.cdr

figure 10

(5) If the right format is detected the calibration starts automatically and you can skip step (6). (6) If the wrong format is detected a warning message will be displayed. - Press the confirm key to start the calibration with the wrong format, or to stop calibration. - Press the escape key . Remove the cassette and press confirm key The calibration main screen will be displayed.






DD+DIS219.06E

(7) The IP-center calibration has been successful, if the message Calibration successful pops up. If the calibration has not been successful, continue with section 2.2.4.

Calibration successful ...press

Service menu Maintenance Calibration

to continue

:ok 5148_Chap03.6_038.cdr

figure 11

(8) Press confirm key

.

(9) Perform a shading calibration (see section 2.3) and finally a verification (see section 2.4).

2.2.4

Failed IP-Center Calibration Find the possible results of a failed IP-center calibration below: Information on the Display

Details see

Reason

Check collimation and optics

•

Flatfield was not used.

•

A defective IP was used (with scratches in slowscan direction).

Underexposed

•

The exposure conditions were wrong (e.g. the dose was too low).

•

The filter was not positioned correctly.

•

The photomultiplier floppy was not installed properly after a photomultiplier (PMT) replacement.

•

The backup floppy was not installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting.

•

The exposure conditions were wrong (e.g. the dose was too high).

•


•

The photomultiplier floppy was not installed properly after a PMT replacement.

•

The backup floppy was not installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting.

Overexposed

2.2.4.1

2.2.4.2

2.2.4.3






DD+DIS219.06E

NOTE: The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital 12 bit value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The SAL values during a calibration must be in a range of approximately 730 to 4095. 2.2.4.1

Check collimation and optics (dynamic range bigger than 1:2) (1) A failure message pops up with a long beep.

Service menu Maintenance Calibration Check coll. and optics ...press

X

to repeat


figure 12

(2) Press the confirm key . Make sure that the IP was exposed without collimation. Check the IP for scratches in slow scan direction. Redo calibration. (3) Otherwise, press the escape key

to cancel the calibration.

(4) Redo calibration.

2.2.4.2

Underexposed (SAL < 730) (1) A failure message pops up. (2) Press the confirm key . Increase the exposure dose. Check the exposure conditions and the filter alignment. Redo the calibration. (3) If the failure message pops up again, press the escape key . Check if the the photomultiplier floppy was installed properly after a PMT replacement. Check if the backup floppy was installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting. Install the corresponding floppy if necessary. Redo the calibration.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.2.4.3

Overexposed (SAL > 4095) (1) A failure message pops up. (2) Press the confirm key . Decrease the exposure dose. Check the exposure conditions and the filter alignment. Redo the calibration. (3) If the failure message pops up again, press the escape key . Check if the the photomultiplier floppy was installed properly after a PMT replacement. Check if the backup floppy was installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting. Install the corresponding floppy if necessary. Redo the calibration.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.3

Shading Calibration REQUIRED TIME: Approximately 120 min.

PREREQUISITES / REQUIRED TOOLS: •

•

X-ray source (GenRad recommended) If a GenRad X-ray source is available, this should be used for all applications: the GenRad, Mammo and Extremity. For a pure Mammo site use a Mammography X-ray source with the largest available bucky. Cassette format (GenRad: 35 x 43 cm or Mammo:24 x 30 cm): Always expose the largest cassette format used in the hospital. If the cassette format 18 x 24 cm is used, the calibration is not valid for 24 x 30 cm cassette formats or higher!

•

For a GenRad X-ray source: Cu-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2

•

For a Mammography X-ray source: - Al-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0 - CR Mammography calibration kit which has the spare part number*: 10+7 9820 0424 0

* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

NOTE: The GenRad X-ray source and the Mammography X-ray source require different prerequisites. Do not use GenRad X-ray source with Al-filter or Mammography X-ray source with Cu-filter! NOTE: For Mammography X-ray source, in order to fix the Al-filter below the collimation window, a reliable adhesive tape is necessary. Depending on the adhesive tape, a solvent may be required for the cleaning of the X-ray source. Make sure the tape is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.






DD+DIS219.06E

The shading calibration procedure consists of the following steps: How?

Procedure

Details see

Erase cassette

2.3.1

Expose cassette

2.3.2

Start shading calibration

2.3.3

Verification

2.3.1

2.4

Erase the Cassette (1)

Press the Erase key on the local keypad of the digitizer and the following screen appears (see figure 13).

BUSY ERASURE

WARNING The next cassette(s) will be erased Enter number of cassettes to erase: Put cassette in input buffer or press X to quit CR85B

1

5148_Chap03.6_039.cdr

figure 13

2.3.2

(2)

Place the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer.

(3)

Wait for erased cassette at the output buffer.

Expose the Cassette NOTE: The GenRad X-ray source can be used for both, the GenRad and the Mammo, calibration procedure.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.3.2.1

Exposure of the Cassette for a GenRad X-ray source (1)

Place the largest cassette in length direction to the X-ray tube as shown in figure 14.

Rotating Anode

x-ray tube Cathode

51 48

_3

. 6.c dr

O.K.

Not O.K.

figure 14

(2)

Ensure that the entire image plate is fully exposed! The collimated field must be larger than the image plate!

figure 15

(4)

Place the Cu-filter below the collimation window.

(5)

Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 µGy: - 12 mAs, - 75 kV, - 1.3 m (51,2”) distance, - Large focus.

NOTE: Best use a dosimeter to measure the dose! (6)


(7)

Turn the cassette 180°.

(8)

Expose the cassette again. After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total with a dose of 20 µGy.

(9)

Remove the Cu-filter.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.3.2.2

Exposure of the “CR Mammo Calibration Kit” Cassette for a Mammography X-ray source NOTE: The exposure of the “CR Mammo Calibration Kit” cassette with a Mammography X-ray source is only applicable for the Mammography shading calibration. (1)

Remove the compression paddle.

(2)

Fix the Al-filter below the collimation window and check that the appropriate window is selected according to the bucky size. Make sure the tape is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.

(3)

Select the following exposure parameters: - 200 mAs, - 28 kV, - Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo), - large focus.

(4)

Put the cassette in the bucky.

(5)


NOTE: Perform one single exposure! Rotation of cassette is not required.

2.3.3

(6)


(7)

Clean the X-ray source with a solvent.

Start the Shading Calibration NOTE: Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration.






DD+DIS219.06E

(1)

Enter the Service menu.

(2)

Select <2 MAINTENANCE> <2 Calibration>. <2 Shading Calibration>.

(3)

Choose one of 4 possible applications for shading calibration (details see table below). When an application has been calibrated successfully, the remark “o.k.” will be shown next to the application on the display (see figure 16).

Selection Exposure on the Application Type User (X-ray source) Interface GenRad

1 GenRad fast* 2 GenRad slow

Mammo

Extremity

3 Mammo

4 Extremity

GenRad (default selection)

Which application shall be calibrated? 1 2 3 4

GenRad fast GenRad slow Mammo Extremity

o.k.

Service menu Calibration Shading X

:cancel :ok 5148_Chap03.6_001.c

figure 16

Remarks

Details see

- Use the biggest GenRad cassette available (35x43 cm) - Use Cu-filter

2.3.3.1

GenRad - Use the biggest GenRad (recommended cassette available (35x43 cm) if available) - Use Cu-filter.

2.3.3.2

Mammo

- Choose a X-ray source with the smallest heel effect.** - Use the biggest Mammo cassette available (24x30 cm) - Use Al-filter.

GenRad (default selection)

- Use the biggest GenRad cassette available (35x43 cm) - Use Cu-filter.

2.3.3.1

* The GenRad formats 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm are always scanned in Fast Scan Mode. ** In general modalities of Siemens are known to have a low heel effect.

NOTE: If the Mammo application is not activated: - A Mammo shading calibration with a GenRad cassette can be performed, anyway. - A Mammo shading calibration with a Mammo Cassette can not be performed.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.3.3.1

Application “GenRad“ or “Extremity” After the application has been chosen Exposure parameters: Service menu Filter: 1.5 mm Cu the exposure parameters for the Calibration 2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading cassette are shown on the display. turn 180 degree (Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, 12 mAs, 75 kVp) Insert cassette 35x43cm

X

:cancel

5148_Chap03.6_009.cdr

figure 17

(1) Insert the exposed cassette. (2) In case the cassette has been identified by mistake the following Cassette is identified screen will be displayed: with patient data. - Press the escape key , if you Press to calibrate want to scan the cassette: the or X to scan. name of the patient will be shown. - Press the confirm key , if you figure 18 want to start the calibration.



(3) If the right format is detected the calibration starts automatically and you can skip step (4). (4) If the wrong format is detected a warning message will be displayed. - Press the confirm key to start the calibration with the wrong format, or

Format is smaller than recommended!

Service menu Calibration Shading

Shading calibration will X only be valid for calibrated format and smaller ones.

:cancel :ok 5148_Chap01_027.cdr

- Press the escape key to stop calibration. Remove the cassette and press confirm key .

figure 19

The calibration main screen will be displayed. Continue with section 2.3.2.






DD+DIS219.06E

(5) If the shading calibration has been successful the message Calibration successful pops up (e. g. “GenRad fast”). If the calibration has not been successful, continue with section 2.3.4.


Service menu Calibration Shading GenRad fast Calibration successful SAL: 2356, Dose okay ...press to continue

:ok 5148_Chap03.6_037.cdr

figure 20

.

(7) Redo the calibration for the next application, shown on the display. Continue with section 2.3.2. When an application has been calibrated successfully, the remark “o.k.” will be shown next to the application on the display (see figure 16) When all 3 applications (GenRad fast, GenRad slow and Extremity) have been performed continue with the Mammo application (see section 2.3.3.2). (8) Perform verification (see section 2.4), after all applications have been calibrated.

2.3.3.2

Application “Mammo“ Two possible exposure types can be chosen:

(1)

•

GenRad, if a GenRad X-ray source is available,

•

Mammo , if only a Mammography X-ray source is available.

Choose one of the 2 possible exposure types.

Select exposure type. 1 GenRad 2 Mammo



figure 21






DD+DIS219.06E

Exposure Type ”GenRad” chosen After the application has been chosen Exposure parameters: Service menu Filter: 1.5 mm Cu the exposure parameters for the Calibration 2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading cassette are shown on the display. turn 180 degree (Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, 12 mAs, 75 kVp) Insert cassette 35x43cm

X

:cancel

5148_Chap03.6_009.cdr

figure 22









- Press the escape key to stop calibration. Remove the cassette and press confirm key .

figure 24

The calibration main screen will be displayed. Continue with section 2.3.2.






DD+DIS219.06E

(5) If the shading calibration has been successful the message Calibration successful pops up (e. g. “Mammo”). If the calibration has not been successful, continue with section 2.3.4.


Service menu Calibration Shading Mammo Calibration successful SAL: 2356, Dose okay ...press to continue

:ok 5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr

figure 25

.

(7) Perform verification (see section2.4), after all applications have been calibrated.

Exposure Type “Mammo” chosen IMPORTANT: Ensure that the "CR Mammography calibration kit" cassette is used for the following steps! After the application has been chosen Exposure parameters: Filter: 2 mm Al the exposure parameters for the Exp. Technique: Mo/Mo cassette are shown on the display. 200mAs, 28 kVp No compression paddle


:cancel

Insert cassette 24x30cm 5148_Chap03.6_026.cdr

figure 26









DD+DIS219.06E






- Press the escape key to stop calibration. Remove the cassette and press the confirm key .

figure 28

The calibration main screen will be displayed. Continue with section 2.3.2. (5) If the shading calibration has been successful the message Calibration successful pops up (e. g. “Mammo”). If the calibration has not been successful, continue with section 2.3.4.



:ok 5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr

figure 29

.

(7) Perform verification (see section 2.4), after all applications have been calibrated.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.3.4

Failed Shading Calibration Find the possible reasons for a failed shading calibration below:

Information on the Display Underexposed

•

The exposure conditions were wrong (e.g. the dose was too low).

• •

The filter was not positioned correctly. The photomultiplier floppy was not installed properly after a photomultiplier (PMT) replacement. The backup floppy was not installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting.

• Overexposed

Details see

Reason

•

The exposure conditions were wrong (e.g. the dose was too high).

•


•

The photomultiplier floppy was not installed properly after a PMT replacement. The backup floppy was not installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting.

• •

Dust is present on the IP.

•


•


•

Collimation was used.

•

A defective IP was used (with scratches in slowscan direction).

Modality is vignetting

•

GenRad: - Flatfield was not used. - A defective IP was used. - The collimation was used.

(Warning message only)

•

Mammography: - Flatfield was not used. - A defective IP was used.

Dust detected Check coll. and optics

2.3.4.1

2.3.4.2

2.3.4.3

2.3.4.4

2.3.4.5

NOTE: The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital 12 bit value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The SAL values during a calibration must be in a range of approximately 730 to 4095.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.3.4.1

Underexposed (SAL < 730) (1) A failure message pops up.

Service menu Calibration Shading GenRad fast Failure - underexposed! SAL: 1648, try 2x mAs ...press to repeat

:ok 5148_Chap03.6_006.cdr

figure 30

(2) Press the confirm key . Increase the exposure dose. Check the exposure conditions and the filter alignment. Redo the calibration. (3) If the failure message pops up again, press the escape key . Check if the the photomultiplier floppy was installed properly after a PMT replacement. Check if the backup floppy was installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting. Install the corresponding floppy if necessary. Redo the calibration.

2.3.4.2

Overexposed (SAL > 4095) (1) A failure message pops up.

Service menu Calibration Shading GenRad fast Failure - overexposed! SAL: 4096, try half mAs ...press to repeat

:ok 5148_Chap03.6_004.cdr

figure 31

(2) Press the confirm key . Decrease the exposure dose. Check the exposure conditions and the filter alignment. Redo the calibration. IMPORTANT: For Mammography X-ray source, even if the dose has to be decreased due to overexposure, the settings must not fall below 50 mAs and 0.5 s. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.





DD+DIS219.06E

(3) If the failure message pops up again, press the escape key . Check if the the photomultiplier floppy was installed properly after a PMT replacement. Check if the backup floppy was installed properly after a software installation including hard disk formatting. Install the corresponding floppy if necessary. Redo the calibration.

2.3.4.3

Dust detected (1) A failure message pops up with a long beep. (2) Press the confirm key

.

(3) Check if the exposure parameters have been the same as shown on the display. (4) Clean the optics with the built-in brush. (5) Check on the IP the presence of scratches in slow scan direction and of dust. Look for another IP which is dry, clean and immaculate. (6) Redo calibration.

2.3.4.4

Check collimation and optics (dynamic range bigger than 1:2) (1) A failure message pops up (e. g. “GenRad fast”) with a long beep.

Service menu Calibration Shading GenRad fast Calibration failed! Check coll. and optics ...press to repeat

:ok 5148_Chap03.6_003.cdr

figure 32






DD+DIS219.06E

(2) Press the confirm key . Make sure that the IP was exposed without collimation and with the exposure parameters shown on the display. Check the IP for scratches in slow scan direction. Redo calibration. In case the Mammo exposure type was selected and the above actions do not show success: - Look for the Mammography X-ray source with the smallest heel effect. - Redo the calibration with this X-ray source and use the same bucky size as for the first exposure. (3) Otherwise, press the escape key

to cancel the calibration.

(4) Redo calibration.

2.3.4.5

Modality is vignetting (warning message only) (1) A Calibration successful screen (e. g. “Mammo”) pops up.


:ok 5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr

figure 33


.

(3) A warning message pops up if the Warning: Service menu Calibration signal dropped below the Modality is vignetting. Shading acceptable limit within a range of Please inform customer. 3 mm at the left or right border. Calibration is accepted.

:ok 5148_Chap03.6_002.cdr

figure 34

(4) Press the confirm key

.






DD+DIS219.06E

(5) Check if: - The exposure parameters have been the same as shown on the display. - The collimation was used properly (if the exposure type is GenRad). - The IP has no scratches in slow scan direction or has no dust. - The photomultiplier floppy was properly installed after a PMT replacement. - The backup floppy was properly installed after a software installation including hard disk formatting. (6) Redo the calibration. (7) If the above actions do not show success and in case the Mammo exposure type was selected: - Look for the Mammography X-ray source with the smallest heel effect. - Redo the calibration with this X-ray source and use the same bucky size as for the first exposure. (8) If the warning message still pops up, and still in case the Mammo exposure type was selected, the following workaround is possible: - Take a flatfield as evidence that the collimation area of the X-ray source does not fit with the IP position in the bucky. - Explain the problem to the customer and ask him to call the X-ray supplier for a service intervention. - Carry out a final calibration after the service intervention on the X-ray source.

NOTE: In this workaround the left and the right 3 mm of the image are not shading calibrated. It is the customer’s responsibility to use this workaround and to handle the mismatch of cassette position and beam collimation.






DD+DIS219.06E

2.4

Verification of the Calibration NOTE: The calibration verification is always taking place after the shading calibration was performed. There is no sense to perform the IP-center calibration verification before the shading calibration procedure is done. (1) Expose a cassette with a regular flatfield, to check the image quality of each used application as described in the following table:

Application

Required Cassette

Procedure

GenRad fast

GenRad 35 x 43 cm

2.3.2.1

GenRad slow (1)

any GenRad cassette beside 35 x 43 cm and 35 x 35 cm

2.3.2.1

Mammography

largest format available

2.3.3.2 (2)

Extremity

Extremity 35 x 43 cm (3)

2.3.2.1

(1)

Only if digitizer is in slow mode.

(2)

If a Mammo X-ray modality is used, select 40 mAs instead 200 mAs for the Flatfield exposure.

(3)

You can also temporarily re-initialize a GenRad 35 x 43 cm cassette.






DD+DIS219.06E

(2) Identify the cassette as follows: For GenRad application: On CR QS Processing Station: - Select Study type: . - Select Substudy: . - Confirm Exposure class: <200>.

figure 35

On NX Processing Station: - Select Exam Group: . - Select Exposure Type: . - Confirm Detector Sensitivity: <200>.

figure 36






DD+DIS219.06E

For Mammo application: On CR QS Processing Station: - Select Study type: . - Select Substudy: . - Confirm Exposure class: <50>.

figure 37

On NX Processing Station: - Select Exam Group: . - Select Exposure Type: . - Confirm Detector Sensitivity: <50>.

figure 38

(3) Insert the cassette into the Digitizer. (4) Print the image with a window setting of 1.2 (level setting leaves unchanged). (5) Check the image quality of the flatfield for absence of any stripes and large area inhomogenities (shading calibration) and for absence of lateral borders (IP-center calibration). (6) Start the backup to save the new calibration parameters (see section 3).






DD+DIS219.06E

3

Backup (1)

Update the backup storage media to save the new machine specific data (calibration, PD-factor).

(2)

Enter the Service Menu.

(3)

Select <3 Save data> <2 Machine specific data>.

(4)

Follow the on-line instructions.





Chapter 3.7

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Software Menus, Settings


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

Chapter 3.7 is intentionally left blank.



Document Node ID: 12554998 eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v02


Chapter 3.8

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

Software Releases and Patches


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

Chapter 3.8 is intentionally left blank.



Document Node ID: 12553712 eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v02


Chapter 3.9

HEALTHCARE

Repair and Service

Imaging Services

FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

Chapter 3.9 is in preparation and will be made available via MedNet.



Document Node ID: 12554614 eq_03-9_faq_e_template_v02


HEALTHCARE

Chapter 4


Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document contains:

►

•

reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the machine including an alphanumeric reference list

•

block diagrams and overall diagrams

•

circuit diagrams of printed circuit boards, if necessary


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin




Document Node ID: 12403364 eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v02


DD+DIS219.06E




(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS

A

IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................5

1

OVERVIEW OF UNITS.............................................................................................................5

2

LIST OF COMPONENTS .........................................................................................................6

3

FRAME (ASSEMBLY NO. 100) ..............................................................................................12

4

5

6

7

3.1

Diagram...................................................................................................................................12

3.2

Table of Components..............................................................................................................13

POWER UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 200)....................................................................................14 4.1

Diagram A – Part 1 .................................................................................................................14

4.2

Table of Components / Diagram A – Part 1............................................................................15

4.3

Diagram A – Part 2 .................................................................................................................16

4.4

Table of Components / Diagram A – Part 2............................................................................17

4.5

Diagram B – Part 1 .................................................................................................................18

4.6

Table of Components / Diagram B – Part 1............................................................................19

4.7

Diagram B – Part 2 .................................................................................................................20

4.8

Table of Components / Diagram B – Part 2............................................................................21

CPCI RACK (ASSEMBLY NO. 300) .......................................................................................22 5.1

Diagram...................................................................................................................................22

5.2


SCAN UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 400) .......................................................................................24 6.1

Diagram...................................................................................................................................24

6.2


ERASURE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 500)................................................................................26 7.1

Diagram...................................................................................................................................26

7.2






DD+DIS219.06E

8

9

B


IP TRANSPORT UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 600).......................................................................28 8.1

Diagram...................................................................................................................................28

8.2


CASSETTE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 700) ..............................................................................30 9.1

Diagram A ...............................................................................................................................30

9.2

Table of Components / Diagram A..........................................................................................31

9.3

Diagram B ...............................................................................................................................32

9.4

Table of Components / Diagram B..........................................................................................33

9.5

Diagram C ...............................................................................................................................34

9.6

Table of Components / Diagram C .........................................................................................35

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................................35





DD+DIS219.06E


A

Identification Diagrams

1

Overview of Units

100

700 600 500 400

300

200

100 Frame 200 Power Unit 300

cPCI Rack

400 Scan Unit 500 Erasure Unit 600 IP Transport Unit 5156_reg04_001.cdr

700 Cassette Unit





DD+DIS219.06E

2


List of Components

Component

Designation

Function

Refer to

(also used by Diagnosis mode) 100

BU319

Socket for Service PC

figure 2

100

BU122

Socket for Transport unit power supply

figure 2

100

BU353

Socket for Erasure unit fan

figure 2

100

GS112

LCD-TERMINAL-BD

LCD terminal board

figure 2

100

GS114

IOBUS-DISTRIB

I/O-bus distributor board

figure 2

100

GS116

EMERGENCY-NODE

Status and Emergency node

figure 2

100

GS118

LCD-DISPLAY

LCD display

figure 2

100

M101

POWER-UNIT-FAN

Power unit fan

figure 2

500

M501

ERASURE-UNIT-FAN

Erasure unit fan

figure 2

100

S101

INTERLOCK-RIGHT

Interlock switch right hand side

figure 2

100

ST22

Plug for Transport unit

figure 2

100

ST319

Adapter Ethernet

figure 2

200

BU1

Socket on GS210

figure 3

200

BU2

Socket on GS210

figure 3

200

BU3

Socket on GS210

figure 3

200

BU3

Socket on GS230

figure 3

200

BU4

Socket on GS210

figure 3

200

BU5

Socket on GS210

figure 3

200

BU5

Socket on GS230

figure 3

200

BU6

Socket on GS210

figure 3

200

BU8

Socket on GS230

figure 3

200

BU235

Socket Power unit fan

figure 3

200

BU283

Socket for Power integration board

figure 3

200

BU289

Socket for Erasure unit

figure 3

200

BU306

Socket for cPCI Power board (230 V)

figure 3

200

BU312


figure 3





DD+DIS219.06E

Component


Designation

Function

Refer to


D9

LED indicator

figure 3

200

D10

LED indicator

figure 3

200

D11

LED indicator

figure 3

200

GS210

ERASURE-CTRL-BD

Erasure control board

figure 3

200

GS230

POWER-INTEGR-BD


figure 3

200

S201

MAINS-SWITCH

Mains switch with overload protection

figure 3

200

S202

INTERLOCK-FRONT

Interlock switch front side

figure 3

200

S203

LINE-SELECTOR

Line selector

figure 3

200

SI201

POW-FUSE

Power Unit fuse T2.0A

figure 3

200

SI202

SM-TRANSF-FUSE

Stepper motor transformer fuse T2.0A

figure 3

200

ST1

Plug on GS210

figure 4

200

ST1

Plug on GS230

figure 4

200

ST2

Plug on GS210

figure 4

200

ST2

Plug on GS230

figure 4

200

ST3

Plug on GS210

figure 4

200

ST4

Plug on GS210

figure 4

200

ST5

Plug on GS210

figure 4

200

ST7

Jumper on GS230 (CM+9 5156 6450 1)

figure 4

200

ST8

Jumper on GS230 (CM+9 5156 6450 1)

figure 4

200

ST309

Plug Interlock switch right hand side

figure 4

200

ST310

Plug I/O-bus power unit

figure 4

200

ST337

Plug on BU289, connection to erasure unit

figure 4

200

ST338


figure 4

200

BU1

Socket for Current sense board

figure 5

200

BU2

Socket for Current sense board

figure 5

200

BU311

Socket for Transformer

figure 5





DD+DIS219.06E

Component


Designation

Function

Refer to


GS220

CURRENT-SENSE

Current sense board

figure 5

200

GS240

POWER-SUPPL

Power supply 24 V

figure 5

200

MC201

LINE-FILTER

Line filter

figure 5

200

PE1

Ground

figure 5

200

ST1

Plug Current sense board

figure 5

200

ST229

Mains plug

figure 5

200

TR206

Stepper motor transformer 30 V

figure 5

200

30V-TRANSFORMER ERASURE-TRANSF-UNIT

figure 6

200

TR 201

Transformer erasure lamps 1, 6

figure 6

200

TR 202


figure 6

200

TR 203


figure 6

200

TR 204


figure 6

200

TR 205

Transformer erasure lamps 5, 10 figure 6

200

GS230

POWER-INTEGR-BD

SI 1

figure 6

200

SI 2

figure 6

200

SI 3

figure 6

200

SI 4

figure 6

200

SI 5

figure 6

Ground

figure 7

300

300PE1

300

M301

CPCI-RACK-FAN

cPCI-Rack: Fan motor

figure 7

300

GS300

BACKPLANE

cCPI-Rack: Backplane

figure 7

300

GS302

HARDDISK

cCPI-Rack: Harddisk drive

figure 7

300

GS304

FLOPPY

cCPI-Rack: Floppy drive

figure 7

300

GS306

CPCI-POWER-BD

cCPI-Rack: Power unit

figure 7

300

GS310

SCAN-CTRL-M-BD

Scan Master Board

figure 7

300

GS312

CPU-ARIEL-BD

CPU-Ariel Board

figure 7





DD+DIS219.06E

Component


Designation

Function

Refer to


M401

ROLLER-LIFT-MOT

Roller lift motor

figure 8

400

M402

SLOWSCAN-MOTOR

Slowscan drive motor

figure 8

400

GS410

SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT

Stepper motor board of roller lift motor M401

figure 8

400

GS412

SLOWSCAN-BD

Stepper motor board of slow scan motor M402

figure 8

400

GS420

OPTIKMODUL

Optic Module

figure 8

400

GS422

PM-TUBE 1


figure 8

400

GS436

POLYGON_CTRL

Polygon control board

figure 8

400

GS440

PIN-DIODE-BD

Pin diode board

figure 8

400

GS442

IP-ALIGNMENT-LS

IP alignment light barrier sender

figure 8

400

GS444

IP- ALIGNMENT -LS

IP alignment light barrier receiver figure 8

400

GS446

IP-DET-LS

Scanner IP detection light barrier figure 8

400

GS448

ROLLER-LIFT-LS

Scan roller lift 0-position light barrier

figure 8

400

ST14

Plug for scan roller lift motor

figure 8

400

ST351

Plug for I/O-bus scan

figure 8

500

BU358


figure 9

500

ST349

Plug on BU358, connection to power unit

figure 9

500

LA1 + LA6

ERASURE-LAMPS

Erasure lamps 1 and 6

figure 9

500

LA2 + LA7

ERASURE-LAMPS


figure 9

500

LA3 + LA8

ERASURE-LAMPS


figure 9

500

LA4 + LA9

ERASURE-LAMPS


figure 9

500

LA5+ LA10 ERASURE-LAMPS


figure 9





DD+DIS219.06E

Component


Designation

Function

Refer to


GS602

IP-TRANSPORT-BD

IP transport board

figure 10

600

GS604

IP-TRANSP-0-LS

IP transport 0-position light barrier

figure 10

600

GS606

SOLENOID-VALVE

Solenoid valve

figure 10

600

GS608

VACUUM-PUMP

Vacuum pump

figure 10

600

M601

IP-TRANSPORT-MOT

IP transport motor

figure 10

600

ST123

Plug and socket for power supply figure 10 stepper motor

600

ST350

Plug and socket for solenoid valve and vacuum pump

figure 10

700

GS716

CASS-OPEN-0-LS


figure 11

700

GS720

CASS-SWITCH

Cassette detection switch

figure 11

700

GS722

CASS-CLAMP-0-LS

Cassette clamp 0-position light barrier

figure 11

700

GS726

CASS-POS-DET-LS


figure 11

700

GS728

ALIGN-0-POS-LS

IP alignment 0-position light barrier

figure 11

700

GS730

IP-POS-DET-LS

IP position detection light barrier

figure 11

700

GS732

CASS-IN-DET-LS

Cassette input detection light barrier sender

figure 11

700

GS734

CASS-IN-DET-LS

Cassette input detection light barrier receiver

figure 11

700

GS736

RF-TAG-READER

RF-tag serial reader

figure 11

700

GS738

RF-TAG-ANTENNA

RF-tag antenna

figure 11

700

M702

CASS-OPENER-MOT

Cassette opener motor

figure 11

700

GS714

CASS-BELT-0-LS

Cassette belt 0-position light barrier

figure 12

700

GS718

CASS-LIFT-0-LS

Cassette lift 0-position light barrier

figure 12

700

GS724

CASS-CLAMP-LS

Cassette clamp light barrier

figure 12

700

M701

CASS-ROLLER-MOT

Cassette roller motor

figure 12

700

M703

CASS-LIFT-MOT

Cassette lift motor

figure 12





DD+DIS219.06E

Component


Designation

Function

Refer to


M704

CASS-BELT-MOT

Cassette unit belt motor

figure 12

700

M705

CASS-CLAMP-MOT

Cassette clamping motor

figure 12

700

M706

IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT

IP alignment stepper motor

figure 12

700

BU170

Socket for 40 V cassette power supply

figure 13

700

BU377

Socket for RF-tag serial reader

figure 13

700

GS710

Fivefold stepper motor board, jumper JL1 jumper JL2

figure 13

IP alignment board

figure 13

5FOLD-STEP-BD 5FOLD-STEP-JL1 5FOLD-STEP-JL2

700

GS712

IP-ALIGNMENT-BD

700

ST5

Plug for I/O-bus cassette unit

figure 13

700

ST21

Plug and Socket for cassette opener motor

figure 13





DD+DIS219.06E


3

Frame (Assembly No. 100)

3.1

Diagram

BU353 M501

BU319 ST22

5158_reg04_001.cdr

figure 2





DD+DIS219.06E

3.2


Table of Components Ass.

Abbreviation

Designation

Function

Circuit diagram page/ coord. 7 / B1

(also used by Diagnosis mode)

100

BU319

Socket for Service PC

100

BU122

Socket for Transport unit 6 / A1-B1 power supply

100

BU353

Socket for Erasure unit fan

5 / A4-B4

100

GS112

LCD-TERMINAL-BD

LCD terminal board

7 / D1-D2

100

GS114

IOBUS-DISTRIB

I/O-bus distributor board 7 / B2-B3

100

GS116

EMERGENCY-NODE Status and Emergency node

7 / C3-D3

100

GS118

LCD-DISPLAY

LCD display

7 / E1-F2

100

M101

POWER-UNIT-FAN

Power unit fan

7 / B1

500

M501

ERASURE-UNITFAN

Erasure unit fan

5 / B4

100

S101

INTERLOCK-RIGHT

Interlock switch right hand side

7 / B4

100

ST22

Plug for Transport unit

6 / A3

100

ST319

Adapter Ethernet

7 / A3-B3





DD+DIS219.06E


4

Power Unit (Assembly No. 200)

4.1

Diagram A – Part 1 ST5 ST4

BU1 BU2 BU3 BU4 BU5 BU8

BU3

BU6

ST3 GS210

ST2 ST1

GS230 ST2 BU5 D9 D10 D11

ST1 ST7 ST8

S203

ST309 SI201 SI202 BU283 S201

ST310 S202 BU289

BU235 BU306

BU312

5155_reg04_008.cdr

figure 3





DD+DIS219.06E

4.2


Table of Components / Diagram A – Part 1 Ass.

Abbreviation

Designation

Function

Circuit diagram page/ coord.


200

BU1

Socket on GS210

4 / A2

200

BU2

Socket on GS210

4 / A2/3

200

BU3

Socket on GS210

4 / A3

200

BU3

Socket on GS230

4 / D2

200

BU4

Socket on GS210

4 / A4

200

BU5

Socket on GS210

4 / A4

200

BU5

Socket on GS230

4 / E2

200

BU6

Socket on GS210

4 / A1

200

BU8

Socket on GS230

4 / D2

200

BU235

Socket Power unit fan

4 / E1

200

BU283

Socket for Power integration board

4 / E1

200

BU289


4 / E3

200

BU306

Socket for cPCI Power board (230 V)

4 / D1

200

BU312


4 / E4

200

D9

LED indicator

4 / E2/3

200

D10

LED indicator

4 / E2

200

D11

LED indicator

4 / E2

200

GS210

ERASURE-CTRL-BD Erasure control board

200

GS230

POWER-INTEGR-BD Power integration board 4 / D2-E2

200

S201

MAINS-SWITCH

200

S202

INTERLOCK-FRONT Interlock switch front side

4 / B1

200

S203

LINE-SELECTOR

Line selector

4 / A/B1

200

SI201

POW-FUSE

Power Unit fuse T2.0A

4 / D1

200

SI202

SM-TRANSF-FUSE

Stepper motor transformer fuse T2.0A

4 / B19

Mains switch with overload protection

4 / A1-A4 4 / C1





DD+DIS219.06E

4.3


Diagram A – Part 2 ST5 ST4

BU1 BU2 BU3 BU4 BU5 BU8

BU3

BU6

ST3 GS210

ST2 ST1

GS230 ST2 BU5 D9 D10 D11

ST1 ST7 ST8

S203

ST309 SI201 SI202 BU283 S201

ST310 S202 BU289

BU235 BU306

BU312

5155_reg04_008.cdr

figure 4





DD+DIS219.06E

4.4


Table of Components / Diagram A – Part 2 Ass.

Abbreviation

Designation

Function



200

ST1

Plug on GS210

4 / A4

200

ST1

Plug on GS230

4 / E3

200

ST2

Plug on GS210

4 / A4

200

ST2

Plug on GS230

4 / E2/3

200

ST3

Plug on GS210

4 / A1

200

ST4

Plug on GS210

4 / A1

200

ST5

Plug on GS210

4 / A1

200

ST7

Jumper on GS230 (CM+9 5156 6450 1).

--

For settings, see chapter 3.5. 200

ST8

Jumper on GS230 (CM+9 5156 6450 1).

--

For settings, see chapter 3.5. 200

ST309

Plug Interlock switch right hand side

4 / E3

200

ST310

Plug I/O-bus power unit

4 / E3

200

ST337


4 / E3

200

ST338


4 / E1





DD+DIS219.06E

4.5


Diagram B – Part 1 MC201

GS230

SI1 - SI4 SI5

ST229

TR202 TR201

PE1 TR204 TR205

BU1

ST1 GS220

BU2 TR206 TR203 GS240 BU311

5156_reg04_009.cdr

figure 5





DD+DIS219.06E

4.6


Table of Components / Diagram B – Part 1 Ass.

Abbreviation

Designation

Function

Diagram

(in Diagnosis mode)

page/coord.

200

BU1

Socket for Current sense board GS220

4 / C3

200

BU2

Socket for Current sense board GS220

4 / C3

200

BU311

Socket for Transformer 4 / C3

200

GS220

CURRENT-SENSE

Current sense board

4 / C3-C4

200

GS240

POWER-SUPPL

Power supply 24 V

4 / C1-C2

200

MC201

LINE-FILTER

Line filter

4 / D1

200

PE1

Ground

4 / E4

200

ST1

Plug Current sense board GS220

4 / C4

200

ST229

Mains plug

4 / E1

200

TR206

Stepper motor transformer 30 V

4 / B1-C1

30VTRANSFORMER





DD+DIS219.06E

4.7


Diagram B – Part 2 MC201

GS230

SI1 - SI4 SI5

ST229

TR202 TR201

PE1 TR204 TR205

BU1

ST1 GS220

BU2 TR206 TR203 GS240 BU311

5156_reg04_009.cdr

figure 6





DD+DIS219.06E

4.8


Table of Components / Diagram B – Part 2 Erasure Transformer Unit Ass.

Abbreviation

200

Designation

Function

Diagram page/coord.

ERASURETRANSF-UNIT

4 / B2-B4

200

TR 201


4 / B2

200

TR 202


4 / B2-B3

200

TR 203


4 / B3

200

TR 204


4 / B3-B4

200

TR 205


4 / B4

GS230 Fuses Ass.

Abbr.

Designation

Fuse

Quality

200

GS230

POWER-INTEGR-BD SI 1

T 2.5 A

200

SI 2

T 2.5 A

200

SI 3

T 2.5 A

200

SI 4

T 2.5 A

200

SI 5

T 6.25 A





DD+DIS219.06E


5

cPCI Rack (Assembly No. 300)

5.1

Diagram

M301

GS302 GS304 GS300 GS310 GS312

GS306

figure 7





DD+DIS219.06E

5.2



Abbreviation

Designation

Function


Ground

2 / B2


300

300PE1

300

M301

CPCI-RACK-FAN

cPCI-Rack: Fan motor

2 / A/B1/2

300

GS300

BACKPLANE

cCPI-Rack: Backplane

2 / B/C1-4

300

GS302

HARDDISK

cCPI-Rack: Harddisk drive

2 / A3-A4

300

GS304

FLOPPY

cCPI-Rack: Floppy drive

2 / A3

300

GS306

CPCI-POWER-BD

cCPI-Rack: Power unit

2 / C1

300

GS310

SCAN-CTRL-M-BD

Scan Master Board

2 / C2-C3

300

GS312

CPU-ARIEL-BD

CPU-Oberon Board

2 / C3-C4





DD+DIS219.06E


6

Scan Unit (Assembly No. 400)

6.1

Diagram

figure 8





DD+DIS219.06E

6.2



Abbreviation

Designation

Function



400

M401

ROLLER-LIFT-MOT Roller lift motor

3/C4

400

M402

SLOWSCANMOTOR

3/E4

400

GS410

SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT Stepper motor board of roller lift motor M401

3/C2–D3

400

GS412

SLOWSCAN-BD

Stepper motor board of slow scan motor M402

3/E2-F3

400

GS420

OPTIKMODUL

Optic Module

3/A4

400

GS422

PM-TUBE1


3/A2

400

GS436

POLYGON_CTRL

Polygon control board

3/A3

400

GS440

PIN-DIODE-BD

Pin diode board

3/E1-F1

400

GS442

IP-ALIGNMENT-LS

IP alignment light barrier sender

3/D1-E1

400

GS444

IP- ALIGNMENT LS

IP alignment light barrier receiver

3/E1

400

GS446

IP-DET-LS

Scanner IP detection light 3/F1 barrier

400

GS448

ROLLER-LIFT-LS

Scan roller lift 0-position light barrier

3/C1-D1

400

ST14

Plug for scan roller lift motor

3 / C3/4

400

ST351

Plug for I/O-bus scan

3 / C2

Slowscan drive motor





DD+DIS219.06E


7

Erasure Unit (Assembly No. 500)

7.1

Diagram

BU358

LA1 LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10 5156_reg04_007.cdr

figure 9





DD+DIS219.06E

7.2



Abbreviation

Designation

Function

Circuit diagram page/ coord. 5 / B2-B3


500

BU358


500

ST349

Plug on BU358, 5 / B2-B3 connection to power unit

500

LA1 + LA6

ERASURE-LAMPS


5 / B2-F2

500

LA2 + LA7

ERASURE-LAMPS


5 / B2-F2

500

LA3 + LA8

ERASURE-LAMPS


5 / B2-F2

500

LA4 + LA9

ERASURE-LAMPS


5 / B2-F2

500

LA5+ LA10

ERASURE-LAMPS

Erasure lamps 5 and 10 5 / B2-F2

NOTE: Erasure unit fan M501 is part of the frame (Assembly No. 100)!





DD+DIS219.06E


8

IP Transport Unit (Assembly No. 600)

8.1

Diagram

ST350 ST123

JL1 1

8

GS608 GS602

GS604 GS606

M 601 5155_reg04_005.cdr

figure 10





DD+DIS219.06E

8.2



Abbreviation

Designation

Function


600

GS602

IP-TRANSPORT-BD

IP transport board

6 / B2-B3

600

GS604

IP-TRANSP-0-LS

IP transport 0-position light barrier

6 / C2-D3

600

GS606

SOLENOID-VALVE

Solenoid valve

6 / E1-F1

600

GS608

VACUUM-PUMP

Vacuum pump

6 / E2-F2

600

M601

IP-TRANSPORTMOT

IP transport motor

6 / C/D3

600

ST123

Plug and socket for power supply stepper motor

6 / B2

600

ST350

Plug and socket for solenoid valve and vacuum pump

6 / C1






DD+DIS219.06E


9

Cassette Unit (Assembly No. 700)

9.1

Diagram A

GS736

M702

GS738 GS728

GS716

GS726 GS720

GS730

GS732

GS734

GS722 5155_reg04_010.cdr

figure 11





DD+DIS219.06E

9.2


Table of Components / Diagram A Ass.

Abbreviation

Designation

Function


700

GS716

CASS-OPEN-0-LS


1 / C5-D6

700

GS720

CASS-SWITCH

Cassette detection switch

1 / D5-D6

700

GS722

CASS-CLAMP-0-LS

Cassette clamp 0-position light barrier

1 / B5-B6

700

GS726

CASS-POS-DET-LS


1 /E5-E6

700

GS728

ALIGN-0-POS-LS

IP alignment 0-position 1 / G5-G6 light barrier

700

GS730

IP-POS-DET-LS

IP position detection light barrier

1 / G5-G6

700

GS732

CASS-IN-DET-LS

Cassette input detection light barrier sender

1 / F5-F6

700

GS734

CASS-IN-DET-LS

Cassette input detection light barrier receiver

1 / E5-F6

700

GS736

RF-TAG-READER

RF-tag serial reader

1 / G1-G2

700

GS738

RF-TAG-ANTENNA

RF-tag antenna

1 / H1

700

M702

CASS-OPENER-MOT

Cassette opener motor 1 / D1






DD+DIS219.06E

9.3


Diagram B GS714 GS718 GS724

M703

M705

M704

M701 M706 figure 12

5155_reg04_011.cdr





DD+DIS219.06E

9.4


Table of Components / Diagram B Ass.

Abbreviation

Designation

Function


700

GS714

CASS-BELT-0-LS

Cassette belt 0position light barrier

1 / A5-A6

700

GS718

CASS-LIFT-0-LS

Cassette lift 0-position light barrier

1 / A5-B6

700

GS724

CASS-CLAMP-LS

Cassette clamp light barrier

1 / C5-C6

700

M701

CASS-ROLLER-MOT

Cassette roller motor

1 / E1

700

M703

CASS-LIFT-MOT

Cassette lift motor

1 / C1

700

M704

CASS-BELT-MOT

Cassette unit belt motor

1 / B1

700

M705

CASS-CLAMP-MOT

Cassette clamping motor

1 / A1

700

M706

IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT

IP alignment stepper motor

1 / F1






DD+DIS219.06E

9.5


Diagram C

GS712 BU377 ST21

JL1 1

ST5

BU170

JL2 8

8

1

5156_reg04_005.cdr

GS710 figure 13





DD+DIS219.06E

9.6

Table of Components / Diagram C Ass.

B


Abbreviation

Designation

Function



700

BU170

Socket for 40 V cassette power supply

1 / G3

700

BU377

Socket for RF-tag serial reader

1 / G2

700

GS710

1 / A3-F4

5FOLD-STEP-JL1 5FOLD-STEP-JL2

Fivefold stepper motor board, jumper JL1 jumper JL2

IP-ALIGNMENT-BD

IP alignment board

1 / F3-F4

5FOLD-STEP-BD

700

GS712

700

ST5

Plug for I/O-bus cassette unit

1 / G4

700

ST21

Plug and Socket for cassette opener motor

1 / D2

Circuit Diagrams F1.5158.4003.0 (sheet 1-7)

(see the following pages)





A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

GS738-RFTAG-ANTENNA

GS736-RFTAG-READER 1 BU1 *6/6

ST1 #11/20

2/2

1/2

F8.5155.4502.X

2/2

ST377 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 700MA8

700MA2

2

F8.5156.4622.X

RF_READER

/PCI_RACK_300.2F

100MA 700MA3

1/5 2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5

*4/4

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

2/2

1/2

ST5

1 2 3 4

2

1

ST157

F8.5156.4506.X

-ST360

700C1

BU1

4 4/4

1/2

10000μF/63V +

*4/4

ST14

1 2 3 1/4 2/4 3/4

ST15

*4/4

ST18

1 2 3 4

L8.7674.8820.0

F8.5145.4574.X

F8.5145.4524.X

-BU371

BU377 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

1 2 3 4 B1

B3

B2

B4 A4

F8.5158.4690.X

1 2 3 4

A3

700MA6

700MA10

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

ST17

*4/4

ST24

1 2 3 4

ST23

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

4 4/4

*4/4

ST33

1 2 3 1/4 2/4 3/4

ST32

*4/4

700MA7

1

700MA12

1

700MA16 1 2 3 4

A1 A2

ST21

F8.5120.5165.X

F8.5120.5165.X

F8.5145.4574.X

700MA14

1

1

1 700MA11

1

ST34

YE

700MA9

700MA1 700MA15

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

RD

1

1

1

ST35

YE

GS736/ST1 1 2 3 4

F8.5145.4574.X

700MA13

2

M

OR

1

1

*2/2

BR

M RD

YE

F8.5155.4508.X

-M706-IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT

OR

RD GN

GN

M

OR

YE

GNWT YEWT YE

RD

BR

1

BK

M

M701-CASS-ROLLER-MOT

*6/6

5/20 6/20 7/20 8/20 9/20

M

OR

BR

BU1

*6

5 6 7 8 9

M

M702-CASS-OPENER-MOT

M703_CASS-LIFT-MOT

RD RDWT BKWT BK

GNWT YEWT YE

BR

ST1 1/20 2/20 3/20 4/20

M704-CASS-BELT-MOT

M705-CASS-CLAMP-MOT

RD RDWT BKWT

1

F7.0486.1316.X

F7.0486.1351.X

#4/6

3

1 F8.5155.4502.X

ST170

BU170 1 2 3 4

5

ST4

40v_cass

1 2 3 4

F8.5155.4612.X

/POWER_UNIT_200.2 3

JL1

*2/2

5678

1/2

ST10 4A 2A ST1

#4/6

ST421

GS712/BU1

*26/26

*26

F8.5155.4629.X

1

#26 *26

F8.5155.4504.X #4/6

ST5

*26

*26 *26

BU349

#4/6

*4/4

GS712-IPALIGNMENT-BD F8.9499.8140.X

#4/6

IO-BUS_CASS /FRAME_100.2A

F8.5155.4636.X

#2

700MA5

JL2

SUBNODE1

*4/4

F8.9499.8120.X JL1

12 34 5 67 8

SUBNODE2

#4/6

8 76 5 43 21

1234

GS710-5FOLDSTEP-BD

*2/2

#4/6

ST3

#4/6

#4/6

ST2

#4/6

4

4

*26/26

ST3

6/6

5/6

4/6

3/6

2/6

1/6

ST51

#4/6

ST19

#4/6

#4/6

ST8

#4/6

ST11

*26/26

#4/6

ST39

#4/6

ST40

#4/6

#4/6

ST2

#4/6

#4/6

ST38

*4

*4

#4/6 F8.9889.0615.X

#4/6

*26

6

GS710/BU3

5

4

3

2

1

*4 F8.9889.0570.X

F8.5156.4518.X

*4

*4

*4

F8.9889.0585.X

F8.9889.0585.X

F8.9889.0555.X

*4

*4 F8.9889.0560.X

F8.9889.0540.X

*4

F8.9889.0555.X

F8.5155.4504.X

1

F8.5155.4510.X

5 *4

ST1

#4/6

*4 #4/6

ST1

1 2 3 4 1/6 2/6 3/6 4/6

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

ST1

ST1

1 2 3 4

*4

ST1

#4/6

*3 *3/3

ST1

ST1

#4/6

*4

*4 #4/6

ST1

*4/4

ST1

#4/6

ST1

#4/6

ST1

*4

*4

*4

5

X X X X

GS718-CASSLIFT-0-LS F8.9499.6540.X

GS714-CASSBELT-0-LS

GS724-CASSCLAMP-LS F8.9499.6540.X

GS716-CASSOPEN-0-LS F8.9499.6540.X

GS720-CASSSWITCH F8.5156.7000.X

GS734-CASSIN-DET-LS F8.5100.7460.X

GS726-CASSPOS-DET-LS F8.9499.6540.X

GS732-CASSIN-DET-LS F8.9499.4630.X

VDE/UL/CSA - Teil Aenderungen nur mit Zustimmung von

GS730-IP-POSDET-LS F8.9499.6770.X

GS728-ALIGN0-POS-LS F8.9499.6540.X

FT-LPS

6

6

USER APPR.

© AGFA

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without explicit authorisation is strictly forbidden.

F8.9499.6540.X

GS722-CASSCLAMP-0-LS F8.9499.5880.X

B

C

D

E

F

NAME

20.04.06

Leith.

General Schematic CR 35-X

Project 5158

0B

39324

4.09.06

Leith.

Sheet name: CASSETTE_UNIT_700

/ 100

0A

39251

14.07.06

Leith.

F1.5158.4003.0

Sheet 1

DATE

NAME

Replacement for

37889 A

DATE

IDX

Change-NR

NORM

of

7 SH

A

B

C

CPCI-RACK-FAN

3J4 #135/137

-M300

E

F

BU1 *3/3

3J1 #135/137 ST429

M 2

BU5 *3/3

D

1 BU875 1 2

ST427 1 2

1

1 2

BU1

BU6 #48/50

ST1 #48/50

1/2 2/2

1 GS306 F8.5146.1430.X

F8.5155.4670.X

CPCI-POWER-BD MC301

BU883 L

L1

L

BU876 1

BU870 1

3A 250VAC

PE

/POWER_UNIT_200.1F

BU877 1

BU313 1

N

3

ST3 1/4 2/4 3/4

4

4/4

N1

N

POWER 300PE1

2J4 #135/137

BU4 1/17 2/17 8/17 9/17 10/17 15/17 3/17 4/17 7/17 11/17 12/17 14/17 5/17 6/17 13/17 16/17 17/17

GS310/ST4 1 bk 2 br 8 rd 9 or 10 ye 15 gn 3 bk 4 br 7 rd 11 or 12 ye 14 gn 5 bk 6 br 13 rd 16 17

BU6 #10/11

GS310/ST6 #10

BU2 #135/137

1

2

2J1 #135/137

BU1 #135/137

10/11

GS304

BU317 *34

BU3 #9/10

ST1 #34/36

SCAN-CTRL-M-BD

ST1 1/4 2/4

3

BU314 *34

BU315 1 2

BU5 #25/27 26/27 ST1 #25/27

/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B

2

POLYGON_CTRL

F7.0477.1084.X

GS310/BU2 #9

RF_READER

F8.5156.4622.X


/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.2I

10 GS310/ST3 #9 GS310/ST5 #25 26

F8.5156.4640.X

LCD

F8.5156.4570.X

IO_Bus_PCI

F8.5156.4646.X

LD-MODUL

F7.0477.1070.0

ethernet

F8.5156.4610.X

service

/FRAME_100.1A /FRAME_100.2A

GS310/BU1 #25

3

26

F8.5146.1460.X


GS310 ST1 1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

BU316 1 2 3 4

BU318

ST428

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

ST2 #68/70

ST318 1 2 3 4

BU3 1/4 2/2 3/4 4/4

ST2 #68/70

1J4 #135/137

P4 #135/137

1J2 #135/137

P8 #135/137

1J1 #135/137

P10 #135/137

GS302

ST1 *8/8

BU1 *11/11

HARDDISK F7.0486.1354.X

GS312/BU1 *8

GS312/ST1 *10

1

2

/FRAME_100.3A

/FRAME_100.1A

4

4

F8.5146.1440.X F7.0486.1342.0 BACKPLANE GS300

CPCI-RACK © AGFA


PM_1

L7.0460.9089.0

26/27

FLOPPY L7.0486.1365.X

F8.5158.4636.X

L7.0460.9074.0

ST2 #9/11

ST2 #34/36

L7.0460.9089.0

USER

F8.5146.1500.X

CPU-OBERON-BD GS312

F8.5156.1400.X

APPR.

B

C

NAME

20.04.06

Leith.

General Schematic CR 35-X Sheet name:

PCI_RACK_300

0B

39324

4.09.06

Leith.

0A

39251

14.07.06

Leith.

F1.5158.4003.0

DATE

NAME

Replacement for

37889 A

DATE

IDX

Change-NR

NORM

Project 5158 / 100 Sheet 2 of

7 SH

ST1 #4/6

ST1 #4/6

ST1 #8/10

F8.5155.4432.X

*10

*4

GS440/BU1

*4

GS446/BU1

#8

GS444/BU1

1

ST3 #10/12

ST1 #4/6

BU1 #6/7

GS440/BU3

*4

GS448/BU1

SCAN-IP-DET-LS

1

F8.9889.0580.X

400MA2

ST2 #12/14

IR-Send D7

GS440-PIN-DIODE-BD f1-5155-4963-0a.dfs GS440/BU2

*12

F8.5158.4636.X

*4

GS442/BU1 F8.9889.0520.X

GS446 F8.9499.4640.X

IP-Alignment-LS

ST1 #4/6 S5

GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS F8.9499.6540.x

F

GS444 f1-5155-2233-0a.df

IP-Alignment-LS

F8.5155.4628.X

F8.5155.4638.X

L7.0460.9089.0

F8.5155.4434.X

St10

4A 7 8

ST8 #4/6

2A JL1

1 2 3 4

GND GND

ST2 #4/6

ST3 #4/6

St10

2A

JL1 1 2 3 4 5 6

5 6

ST11 #4/6

7 8

ST10 *3/3

ST10 *3/3 ST9 ST5 *4/4

1

ST7

1/4

2/4

3/4

1

2

3

3

4 3 2 1

GS412/BU7 4

ST5 4/4 GS412/BU5 4

GS410/BU7

F8.5145.4592.X

4/4

F8.9499.8140.X GS412-SLOWSCAN-BD

4/4 3/4 2/4 1/4 ST7 4 3 2 1 1

400MA4

+ GND GND

2/4 1/4

+

4A

+

3/4

+

ST1 *26/26

ST3 #4/6

4 5

F8.9499.8140.X GS410-SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT

400MA7 GS436/BU1

ST11 #4/6

ST4 1/5 2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5

2 1

4 5

GS412/BU4 1 2

3

ST4 1/5 2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5

ST2 #4/6

ST8 #4/6

ST1 *26/26

F8.5156.4646.X

F7.0477.1084.X

1/17 2/17 8/17 9/17 10/17 15/17 3/17 4/17 7/17 11/17 12/17 14/17 5/17 6/17 13/17 16/17 17/17 ST1

L7.0460.9074.0

GS410/BU4 1 2

400MA3

*8

GS412/BU2 2

3 ST1 *8/8 S1

GS412/ST3

*4

GS412/BU1

400MA1

-GS422-PM-Module F8.5148.2250.X

*4

GS410/ST3

*26

*26

GS410/BU2

*4

F8.5155.4436.X

GS410/BU1

1 2

ST351 *26

*4

BU351 *26

400MA2

GS422/BU1 1 bk 2 br 8 rd 9 or 10 ye 15 gn 3 bk 4 br 7 rd 11 or 12 ye 14 gn 5 bk 6 br 13 rd 16 17

E GS442 f7-5155-2221-0.dfb

IO-BUS_SCAN

40V_SCAN

LD-MODUL

D

/FRAME_100.2A

/PCI_RACK_300.3F

/PCI_RACK_300.2F POLYGON_CTRL

PM_1 1

C

/POWER_UNIT_200.2F

B /PCI_RACK_300.2F

A

ST2 #25/27

4

F8.5145.4760.X

YE 1

400MA6

OR

M

26

F8.5145.4578.X

26/27

400MA5

Shielding

BL

M

RD

M401-ROLLER-LIFT-MOT

USER APPR.

B

NAME

20.04.06

Leith.

4


SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400

39324

4.09.06

Leith.

0A

39251

14.07.06

Leith.

F1.5158.4003.0

DATE

NAME

Replacement for

37889 C

DATE

0B

(IP-Clamp) A

ORWT BKWT BK

M402-SLOWSCAN-MOTOR

YE WT GS420 OPTIKMODUL F8.5156.2700.X

1

GS420/BU2 #25

© AGFA


4 3 2 1

BU421

YEWT RDWT RD

A4 A3 A2 A1 B4 B3 B2 B1

ST14

-GS436-Polygon-Driver-BD

IDX

Change-NR

NORM


7 SH

A

B

C

D

F8.5155.4130.X

1/5 2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5

1/3

-ST237 1

F8.5158.4142.X

4

-BU292

BU272

6

BU271

4

100VAC

BU333

1 1 BU332 F8.5155.4120.X

Si202

*3

200PE1

BU335

-XK13

14 0V /15 TR206-30VTRANFORMER

GS240-24V-

0V

sw (bk)

15

13.0 VAC

BU311

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

sw (bk)

8 1 2 3

7

4

6

120.1VAC (rd) rt 100VAC (bk) sw 3.2AT

0V bl

12.4 VAC

13 15

sw (bk)

ST310

sw (bk)

BU317 *20

BU342 *26

F8.5156.6480.X

TR205-ERASURE-TRANSF 230VAC 9 rt (rd) br 8

120.1VAC (rd) rt

7

100VAC (bk) sw 3.2AT

F8.5155.4180.X

A

0V

12.4 VAC

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 SI1 SI4

rt (rd) sw (bk) sw

6

SI3

-BU341

11

GN

D9 RT

-ST352

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

1 2 3 4

40V_SCAN

2 /SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_4

40v_cass F8.5155.4612.X

/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.3I

ST2 D9 GE

-BU308

T2,5A

F8.5155.4190.X

F8.5155.4140.X

F8.5155.4632.X

ST310 2

2

1

1

BU314

-ST309 BU309

-BU2

4/12 3/12 12/12 6/12 2/12 11/12 9/12 1/12 7/12 10/12

4 3 12 6 2 11 9 1 7 10

IO-BUS_LE

F8.5155.4170.X

200MA5 Interlock F8.5155.4642.X

/FRAME_100.4A 3

ST337

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

F8.5155.4170.X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

F8.5156.4680.X

( Erasure_drilled ) Loesch_verdrillt F8.5156.4680.X

BU312

ST338

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

F8.5156.4680.X

DATE

NAME

20.04.06

Leith.

/ERASURE_UNIT_500.3A

-BU318/AR

4

13

15

BU5

F8.5155.4170.X

4/12 3/12 12/12 6/12 2/12 11/12 9/12 1/12 7/12 10/12 GS220CURRENT-SENSE F8.5155.6440.X

F8.5155.4638.X

*10

/FRAME_100.2A

USER

ERASURETRANSF-UNIT

(bk) 17

APPR.

Sheet name:

POWER_UNIT_200

39324

4.09.06

Leith.

0A

39251

14.07.06

Leith.

F1.5158.4003.0

DATE

NAME

Replacement for

37889 C

General Schematic CR 35-X

0B

bl B

/FRAME_100.1A

ST235

D10 GE

D9

T2,5A

GS230-POWERINTEGR-BD F8.5156.6450.X

ST291

BU1 4 3 12 6 2 11 9 1 7 10

rt (rd)

12.4 VAC

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

*20/20

ST2

*26/26

ST1

4

-ST230

( fan_LE ) Luefter-LE F8.5155.4660.X

T2,5A

sw (bk) 15

17

BU5

D10

BU289

12.4 VAC

0V

13

sw (bk) 17 bl TR204-ERASURE-TRANSF 9 11 230VAC rt (rd) br

F8.5156.6480.X

© AGFA


1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

3.2AT

6

11

F8.5156.6480.X

BU4

-ST231

F8.5155.6420.X

100VAC (bk) sw

D10

T6,25A

F8.5156.6480.X

13.0 VAC

F8.5156.6480.X

GS210-ERASURECTRL-BD

7

SI2

rt

gn

*3/3

-BU293

15

sw (bk)

rt (rd)

BU235

*10/10

SI5

13

12.4 VAC

-ST232 1 2 3 4

8

200MA3

1 2

D11 T2,5A

+5V

ST5

*3

rt (rd)

TR203-ERASURE-TRANSF 230VAC 9 br rt (rd)

rt

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

1 2 3 4

F8.5155.4140.0

+24VDC GND24

BU8

-ST8

17

120.1VAC (rd) rt

1/3 2/3 3/3

*20/20

0V bl

1 2

17

ST1

3.2AT

/IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600

*20

6

100VAC (bk) sw

Transport F8.5155.4614.X

BU3

-ST266 F8.5156.4150.B

F8.5155.4180.X

7

-BU288 -XK12

F7.0460.9079.0

F8.5155.4120.X

12.4 VAC

-ST233 3 4

1/14 2/14 3/14 4/14 5/14 6/14 7/14 8/14 9/14 10/14 11/14 12/14 13/14 14/14

12.4 VAC

13

sw (bk)

120.1VAC (rd) rt

/ERASURE_UNIT_500.4A F8.5155.4614.X 1

11

rt (rd)

6

1 2

/PCI_RACK_300.1A ( fan_erasure ) Luefter-Loesch

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F8.5155.4160.X

*26/26

3.2AT

8

1 2

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

ST308

ST1

100VAC (bk) sw

F8.5156.6480.X

BU3

BU306

BU330

1 2 3

BU336

bl TR202-ERASURE-TRANSF 9 230VAC 11 rt (rd) br

3

T2A

BU369

IN

-ST313

7

120.1VAC (rd) rt

12.4 VAC

-ST234

8

1 2 3 4 F8.5156.6480.X

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

1 2 3

F8.5158.4120.X

/11

-ST283

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

BU304

ST6

TR201-ERASURE-TRANSF 230VAC rt (rd) br

BU2

Netz_Rack

F8.5155.4670.X

POWER-SUPPL

9

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

10

230VAC 120VAC

SI201

T2A

1 BU331

8

F8.5155.4190.X

4/4

BU273

1

3

N ( Power_Rack )

BU303

N

50/60 Hz

PE

BU302

BU334

1

2

3/4

BU299

PE

N1

100/120/230V

L

F8.5158.4110.X

BU283

-XK11

2/4

BU1

BU322

S201-MAINS-SWITCH

-XK14

-BU267

1/4

*3/3

F8.5155.4120.X

21 BU323

22

ST229 BU229

BU305

3/3

ST3

ST5

L

F

F7.0460.9064.0

BU298

L1

S202-INTERLOCK-FRONT F8.5158.4120.X

MC201-LINE-FILTER

BU320

Netz

BU326

BU321

LAST

F8.5155.4120.X

Netz

7

11 ( LINE )

3

8

12

BU325

-ST237

1/3 2/3 3/3

2

4

30.8VAC

ST4

BU328

S203-LINE-SELECTOR

-BU6

1

5

BU324

Last

5 4 3 2 1

2 120V 240V 1 230V

-BU266

BU230

BU327

( LOAD )

100V

3

E

IDX

Change-NR

NORM


7 SH

A

B

C

D

E

F

ERASURE-LAMPS

1

LA1

LA2

LA3

LA4

LA5

1

LA6

LA7

LA8

LA9

LA10

2

2 F8.5155.3585.X

9/9 8/9 7/9 6/9 5/9 4/9 3/9 2/9 1/9

8/9 7/9 6/9 5/9 4/9 3/9 2/9 1/9

-BU350 ( Erasure_drilled )

/POWER_UNIT_200.4F

12/12 11/12 10/12 9/12 8/12 7/12 6/12 5/12 4/12 3/12 2/12 1/12

Loesch_verdrillt F8.5156.4680.X

3

-BU358

-ST350 12/12 11/12 10/12 9/12 8/12 7/12 6/12 5/12 4/12 3/12 2/12 1/12

3

-ST349

F8.5155.4614.X 100MA12

ST353

F8.5155.3620.X

M

3 2 1

1

3 2 1

(fan_erasure ) Luefter-Loesch

BU353

4

4

USER APPR.

B

C

NAME

20.04.06

Leith.


ERASURE_UNIT_500

39324

4.09.06

Leith.

0A

39251

14.07.06

Leith.

F1.5158.4003.0

DATE

NAME

Replacement for

37889 A

DATE

0B © AGFA


/POWER_UNIT_200.1F

2

S

M501-ERASUREUNIT-FAN

IDX

Change-NR

NORM


7 SH

A

B

BU122

/POWER_UNIT_200.1F

1 2 3 4 5 6

Transport F8.5155.4614.X

D

E

F

ST350

F8.5155.4212.X

1 2 3 4 5 6

BU365 1 2 4 5 600MA1

100MA10

1

ST122

C

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5

1 2

BU361

BU360

1 1

1/4

+24V

2/4

BU362

F8.5155.4216.X

4 5

ST1

600MA2

1

3/4

1 2 3 4 B1 B2 B3 B4

BU363 A1 A2 A3 A4

ST123

S1535

BU366

GS606SOLENOID-VALVE F7.0424.2164.0

1

ST1

1/4

1 2 3 4

1

2/4

PUMP 2 GS608VACUUM-PUMP F7.0431.7210.0

600MA4 1 2 4 5

BU359

3/4

ST4

2

BU364 600MA3

1/5 2/5 4/5 5/5

F8.5155.4214.X

BU123

PUMP+24V

ST2 JL1 1234

*4/4

BU70

BU71

*4

*4 F8.9889.0535.X

5678

ST3 *4/4

ST10 4A 2A

ST1 *4/4

GS604-IPTRANSP-0-LS F8.9499.6770.X

ST7 *4/4

M601-IPTRANSPORT-MOT F8.5156.4626.X

IO-BUS_TRANS /FRAME_100.3A 3

BU148[V] ST22[L] *26

BU22[V] *26

*26

ST1 *26/26

F8.5155.4210.X

100MA11

BU347

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

1 2 3 4

BR

M

OR F8.5155.6140.X

3 RD

YE

4

4

USER APPR.

B

C

NAME

20.04.06

Leith.


IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600

39324

4.09.06

Leith.

0A

39251

14.07.06

Leith.

F1.5158.4003.0

DATE

NAME

Replacement for

37889 A

DATE

0B © AGFA


GS602-IPTRANSPORT-BD F8.9499.8140.X

ST5

IDX

Change-NR

NORM


7 SH

A

B

C

D

E

F

F8.5156.4610.X 2

/PCI_RACK_300.4F

Service

*25 -BU319

service 100MA8

2

M101-POWERUNIT-FAN

M

F8.5155.4660.X

Luefter-LE

1

1

/POWER_UNIT_200.1F 1

*8/8

ST4

BU419

*2/2

*2

ST12

2

ST375[A] F8.5156.4570.X

3 4 5 6 7 8

BU2

#25

*25/25

GND

BU350[K]

F8.5155.4629.X

ST1

*26

/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.4I IO-BUS_CASS F8.5155.4628.X

14 12

BU348[K]

ST3

*26

IO-BUS_LE

*26/26

3 2 1

100MA5

BU356[F] *26

F8.5156.4626.X

IO-BUS_TRANS

2

11 10 9 6

*20/20

100MA4 F8.5155.4632.X

/IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600.3A

GS118-LCD DISPLAY F8.8377.3202.X

ST10

*26/26

/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1C

/POWER_UNIT_200.3F

BU418

ST1

ST2

*26

ST1 *20/20

100MA7

GS114/BU2

IO-BUS_SCAN

BU417

*20/20

*26/26

100MA3

2

ST5

1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 8/8

GS112/BU12

IO_Bus_PCI

J1

F8.5156.4640.X

/PCI_RACK_300.3F

/PCI_RACK_300.3F

*20/20

L7.0460.9074.0

LCD

ST9

BU1

( fan_LE)

ST4

GS112LCD-TERMINAL-BD

*26/26

F8.8377.1450.X

100MA6

ST6 *26/26

ST5 *26/26

GS114-IOBUSDISTRIB. F8.9499.6020.X

3

1

F8.5156.4634.X

ST7 *26/26

BU356[K]

BU357[K]

*26

2

3

6

9 10 11 12 14

ST1 *26/26

100MA1

100MA2

3

ST319/RJ45

/PCI_RACK_300.3F

ethernet F7.0477.1070.0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

GS116EMERGENCY-NODE F7.0486.1318.X

Adapter ETHERNET

KEYPAD

/POWER_UNIT_200.3F

F7.5155.1623.0

Interlock

1

4

7

8

3

4

BU344 1

1

4

BU345 1

BU346

BU343

USER

S101-INTERLOCK-RIGHT

APPR.

B

C

NAME

20.04.06

Leith.


FRAME_100

39324

4.09.06

Leith.

0A

39251

14.07.06

Leith.

F1.5158.4003.0

DATE

NAME

Replacement for

37889 A

DATE

0B © AGFA


F8.5155.4642.X

IDX

Change-NR

NORM


7 SH

Spare Parts List CR35-X

Document No: DD+DIS268.08M

Type 5158 / 100

CR25.0 Type 5156 / 100 (up to SN < 6000) Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

CR 25.0 Type 5156/100/105

CR 35-X Type 5158/100

Internal update: 5

CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

Edition 2, Revision 2 11-2008 printed in Germany


Document Node ID: 12403365 spare_parts_e_template_v07


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

Manufacturer Agfa HealthCare N.V. Publisher Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH Tegernseer Landstraße 161 D - 81539 München Germany Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V. All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved. AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries. INSTRUCTION: (1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document (see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the equipment. (2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on the product.

WARNING: Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation. INSTRUCTION: • • •

Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts. Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure. Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com

NOTE: To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.



CR25.0 / CR35-X Type TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 2


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

Document History Edition, Edition, Revision Revision 2.2 2.2

Release Release Date Date 11-2008 11-2008

Changescompared comparedtotoprevious previousversion version2.1 2.1 Changes • Device Device CR25.0 (up SN < 6000) added. CR25.0 (up to to SN < 6000) added. Index adaption of Spare Parts numbers to current • Index adaptation of Spare Parts numbers to stock. current stock. Rack added. • Revive Revive Rack added.

Contact Spare Parts ordering Europe

[email protected]

Overseas

[email protected]

Spare Parts returns Worldwide

[email protected]

NOTE: For Recycling Information please refer to: http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf



CR25.0 / CR35-X Type TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 3


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

Contents

FRONTVERKLEIDUNG, OBEN FRONT PANELING; TOP REVETEMENT AVANT, EN HAUT PAGES 08-09

KASSETENEINHEIT CASETTE UNIT UNITE DE CASSETTES PAGES 12-21

TRANSPORTEINHEIT TRANSPORT UNIT UNITE DE TRANSPORT PAGES 22-25

LOESCHEINHEIT ERASURE MODULE UNITE D’EFFACEMENT PAGES 26-27 VERKLEIDUNG PANELING REVETEMENT PAGES 06-07

SCAN-EINHEIT SCAN UNIT UNITE SCANNER PAGES 28-39

LEISTUNGSEINHEIT POWER SUPPLY BLOC DE PUISSANCE PAGES 44-45

CPCI-RACK / REVIVE RACK CPCI-RACK / REVIVE RACK CPCI-RACK / REVIVE RACK PAGES 40-43

ADC - KASSETTEN ADC CASSETTES CASSETTES ADC PAGES 48-67 MODIFIKATIONSBAUGRUPPEN, ZUBEHÖR MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES KIT DE MODIFICATION, ACCESSOIRE SEITEN / PAGES 46-47

GESTELL FRAME CHASSIS PAGES 10-11

5158_CHAP05_INDEX.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X Type TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 4


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

How to navigate the spare parts list online with the Acrobat Reader (1) (2)

Open Bookmarks

(3) (4)

See overview of the modules

(5)

Appropriate page opens

(6)

Click on green arrow to

Click on "CONTENTS"

Click on requested module

navigate back to the overview of the modules



CR25.0 / CR35-X Type TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 5


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01 02*

03*

05

06* 04*

07* 5158_CHAP05_01_M.CDR

PANELING DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 6


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Item no. Part No. Pos. no. Nr. de Ref.

Benennung Description Denomination

1

CM+9033175050

VERSCHLUßZAPFEN STUD PIVOT DE VERROUILLAGE

2

CM+9515512704

*

SEITENWAND LINKS SIDE WALL, LHS PAROI LATERALE A GAUCHE

3

CM+9515512501

*

DECKEL COVER COUVERCLE

4

CM+9515812600

*

FRONTVERKLEIDUNG UNTEN FRONT PANEL, BOTTOM PANNEAU AVANT, EN BAS

5

CM+9515512631

6

CM+9515612100

*

FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN FRONT PANEL, TOP PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT

7

CM+9515512403

*

SEITENWAND RECHTS SIDE WALL, RHS PAROI LATERALE A DROITE

FOLIENSCHARNIER PLASTIC HINGE CHARNIERE A MEMBRANE

=Assembly D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M" * =No wearing part.

PANELING DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 7


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01* 02* D3188

05 04*

D3188

D3188

03

5158_CHAP05_02_M.CDR

FRONT PANELING, TOP DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 8


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9515612100

*

FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN FRONT PANEL, TOP PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT

2

CM+9515551500

*

KLAPPE MONTIERT FLAP INSTALLED VOLET INSTALLER

3

CM+9515551480

4

CM+9515551901

5

CM+9515512171

ZUGFEDER TENSION SPRING RESSORT DE TRACTION *

VERRIEGELUNG MONTIERT LOCK INSTALLED VERROUILLAGE INSTALLER SCHAUMSTOFFSTREIFEN FOAM PLASTIC STRIPE BANDES EN MOUSSE


FRONT PANELING, TOP DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 9


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List 01 (GS 114)

11 03

02 04 (S101)

12

05 (M501)

11

D969

10 (GS 116)

D333

09

D2222

D21 D85 D372

08 (M 101)

07

06

D86 D2771 5158_CHAP05_03_M.cdr

FRAME DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 10


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9949960202

GS 8FACH IO-VERTEILER (GS114) GS 8-FOLD IO DISTRIBUTOR (GS114) DISTRIBUTION OCTUPLE I / O (GS114)

2

CM+9515546280

KABEL FL/RD 26POL (GS114/BU2 - BU351) CABLE, FLAT AND ROUND 26POLE (GS114/BU2 - BU351) CABLE PLAT ET CYLINDRIQUE (GS114/BU2 - BU351)

3

CM+9047190280

ETHERNET ADAPTER ETHERNET ADAPTER ADAPTATER ETHERNET

4

CM+9042663040

TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER (S101) CASSETTE UNIT SAFETY SWITCH (S101) PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S101)

5

CM+9514636200

LÜFTER 24V VERDRAHTET (M501) FAN 24V (M501) VENTILATEUR 24V (M501)

6

CM+9037095110

RAD 65X12,1 (1 STCK.) WHEEL 65X12,1 (1 PIECE) ROUE 65X12,1 (1 PIÈCE)

7

CM+9037095090

LENKROLLEN (1 STCK.) GUIDE ROLLER (1 PIECE) ROUE GUIDE (1 PIÈCE)

8

CM+9515546600

LÜFTER 24V LE VERDR (M101) FAN 24V LE (M101) VENTILATEUR 24V LE (M101)

9

CM+9515516200

DISPLAY DISPLAY AFFICHEUR

10

CM+9515548200

GS STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116) PCB STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116) CI ETAT NOEUD URGENCE (GS116)

11

CM+9047910140

ABSTANDSHALTER (10 STCK.) SPACER (10 PIECES) ECARTEUR (10 PIÈCES)

12

CM+9515846001

*

KABELBAUM GESTELL CR35-X CABLE HARNESS FRAME CR35-X FAISCEAU DE CABLE CHASSIS CR35-X


FRAME DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 11


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

08

01

09*

02

03 04

(GS714)

(M704) 05 (GS718)

07

06 (GS728) 05 12

11

10 (M701)


CASSETTE UNIT PART 1 DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 12


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9515550800

WINKEL BRACKET EQUERRE

2

CM+9038960000

ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T5X200 TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T5X200 COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T5X200

3

CM+9515552400

KASSETTENHEBER CASSETTE LIFT ELEVATEUR DE CASSETTE

4

CM+9515552311

LEISTE BAR REGLETTE

5

CM+9514590100

LICHTSCHRANKE 1 (GS718, GS728) LIGHT BARRIER 1 (GS718, GS728) BARRIERE LUMINEUSE 1 (GS718, GS728)

6

CM+9988905600

KABEL FL 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1) FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1) CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)

7

CM+9037110110

KUGELBÜCHSE - 16X26X36 SPHERICAL LINER - 16X26X36 DOUILLE SPHERIQUE - 16X26X36

8

CM+9514551952

ZAHNRIEMEN 18,5T5/860 TOOTHED BELT 18,5T5/860 COURROIE CRANTEE, 18,5T5/860

9

CM+9515550900

10

CM+9514551351

RÖLLCHENMOTOR (M701) ROLLER MOTOR (M701) MOTEUR DES GALETS (M701)

11

CM+9514591000

RÖLLCHEN ROLLER ROULEAU

12

CM+9988905550


*

RIEMENUMLENKUNG CROSSOVER BELT COUDAGE DE LA COURROIE




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 13


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

05 (GS720)

04

02

03 06

08 07 (GS730)




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 14


DD+DIS268.08M Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Item no. Part No. Pos. no. Nr. de Ref.

Spare Parts List Benennung Description Denomination

1

CM+9515690500

ÖFFNER OPENER LOUP

2

CM+9515550424

FOLIENAUSRICHTUNG LINKS FOIL ALIGNMENT, LHS ALIGNEMENT A GAUCHE

3

CM+9515645181

KABEL FL CASSETTENANSCHL. 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8) FLAT CABLE CASSETTE STOP 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8) CABLE PLAT BUTEE CASSETTE 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)

4

CM+9514659110

LICHTSCHRANKENFAHNE LIGHT BARRIER LUG CAVALIER DE PHOTO CELLULE

5

CM+9515670000

KASSETTENEINZUG ANSCHLAG LINKS (GS720) CASSETTE FEED STOP, LHS (GS720) INTRODUCTION DES CASSETTE A GAUCHE (GS720)

6

CM+9515550251

LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUSE

7

CM+9515590100

LICHTSCHRANKE (GS730) LIGHT BARRIER (GS730) BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS730)

8

CM+9988906150





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 15


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

02 (GS736)

01

04 03

05 (M702)

(GS738) 14

06 08 (GS716)

07

10

02 09 13 11

12 (GS726)




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 16




1

CM+9515590301

ANTENNENMECHANIK ANTENNA MECHANISM MACANISM DE L'ANTENNE

2

CM+9515552700

READER MIT ANTENNE (GS736, GS738) READER WITH ANTENNA (GS736, GS738) SUPPORT AVEC ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)

3

CM+9515645061

KABEL 20AWG28 TAGREADER CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER

4

CM+9515551200

MOTORWINKEL MOTOR BRACKET EQUERRE DU MOTEUR

5

CM+9514575501

SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTÄNDIG (M702) STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M702) MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M702)

6

CM+9038961230


7

CM+9038960010


8

CM+9514590100

LICHTSCHRANKE 1 (GS716) LIGHT BARRIER 1 (GS716) BARRIERE LUMINEUSE 1 (GS716)

9

CM+9988905850

KABEL FL 4POL FLAT CABLE 4POL CABLE PLAT 4POL

10

CM+9510055030

SCHENKELFEDER LEG SPRING RESSORT A BRANCHES

11

CM+9515555800

SCHWENKPLATTE SWIVEL PLATE PLAQUE PIVOTANTE

12

CM+9515590401

GS LICHTSCHRANKE HIGH-AKTIV (GS726) LIGHT BARRIER BOARD HIGH-ACTIVE (GS726) CI BARRIERE PHOTOELECTRIQUE ACTIF PLUS (GS726)

13

CM+9988905700


14

CM+9515545080

KABEL 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1) CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1) CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 17


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

(M705)

03

(GS724) 04

05 02

17 (M703) 15

14*

16

(GS734)

07

08

(GS722)

09 13

12 11 (M706)

06 (GS732)

10




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 18


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9515650002

KASSETTENEINHEIT CASSETTE UNIT UNITE CASSETTES

2

CM+9515653700

UMLENKEINHEIT GUIDE UNIT UNITÉ DE RENVOI

3

CM+9033500860

ZUGFEDER TENSION SPRING RESSORT DE TRACTION

4

CM+9514590100


5

CM+9988905550


6

CM+9515591201

LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUS

7

CM+9514590200


8

CM+9988905850


9

CM+9515545100

KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51) FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51) CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)

10

CM+9515690201

SPINDELANTRIEB MIT MOTOR SPINDLE DRIVE WITH MOTOR COMMANDE VIS SANS FIN AVEC MOTEUR

11

CM+9514575501

SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTÄNDIG (M706) STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M706) MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M706)

12

CM+9038965490


13

CM+9515650300

HALTERUNG SPINDEL HOLDER FIXATION

14

CM+9514551651

15

CM+9038961180


16

CM+9514651450

MOTORWINKEL MONTIERT MOTOR BRACKET ASSEMBLED EQUERRE DU MOTEUR ASSEMBLE

17

CM+9514672200

SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTÄNDIG (M703) STEPPER MOTOR ASSY (M703) MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPL. (M703)

*

ACHSE SHAFT AXE




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 19


DD+DIS268.08M

10 (GS710)

09

Spare Parts List

08

06

04

02

07

06

05

04

03

02

01 (GS712)

5158_CHAP05_08_M.cdr



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 20




1

CM+9949981406

GS IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712) PCB IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712) CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)

2

CM+9515545042

KABEL BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1) BUS CABLE 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1) CABLE BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)

3

CM+9988906150


4

CM+9988905550


5

CM+9988905700


6

CM+9988905850


7

CM+9515545100

KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51) FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51) CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)

8

CM+9988905600


9

CM+9988905400


10

CM+9949981300

GS IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS710) PCB IOB-SIN-5STEP CI IOB-SIN-5STEP




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 21


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

03

02

D631

14

04 (M 601)

05 06 D38

05

16

13 12

D40

11 (GS 602)

05

15

06 07

09 10 08

D631

12 17 (GS 604) D4340


TRANSPORT UNIT DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 22




1

CM+9515560002

TRANSPORTEINHEIT TRANSPORT UNIT UNITE'DE TRANSPORT

2

CM+9515561155

LEITBLECH GUIDE PLATE TOLE DE GUIDAGE

3

CM+9515561101

LEITBLECH HINTEN GUIDE PLATE, BACK TOLE DE GUIDAGE ARRIERE

4

CM+9515560901

SCHRITTMOTOR (M601) STEPPER MOTOR (M601) MOTEUR PAS A PAS (M601)

5

CM+9037170040

ROHRSCHELLE PIPE CLAMP AGRAFE

6

CM+9515542120

KABEL 8POL (BU122 - ST123) CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123) CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123)

7

CM+9033175390

VERSCHLUßZAPFEN STUD PIVOT DE VERROUILLAGE

8

CM+9036270020

SICHERUNGSRING RETAINING RING BAGUE DE SECURITE

9

CM+9037170070


10

CM+9515542141

KABEL 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123) CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123) CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)

11

CM+9949981406

GS IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602) PCB IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602) CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602)

12

CM+9988905350


13

CM+9047913100

ABSTANDSHALTER SPACER ECARTEUR

14

CM+9515542102

KABEL BUS FL 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L)) FLAT CABLE 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L)) CABLE PLAT 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))

15

CM+9515590700

ZAHNRIEMENRAD TOOTHED BELT WHEEL POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE

16

CM+9038961030

ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145 TOOTHED BELT, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145 COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145

17

CM+9515590800

LICHTSCHRANKE (GS604) LIGHT BARRIER (GS604) BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS604)




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 23


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02

02

X

X

06 (L=90mm)

05

06 (L=27mm) 08 03 02

Detail X

06 (L=100mm) 06 (L=27mm)

06 (L=65mm)

07

04 ONLY FOR DEVICES WHICH ARE LOCATED HIGHER THAN 2000M ABOVE SEE LEVEL (SEE SB DD+DIS276.07E) 5158_CHAP05_10_M.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 24




1

CM+9515560002

TRANSPORTEINHEIT TRANSPORT UNIT UNITE'DE TRANSPORT

2

CM+9515592402

SAUGER KOMPLETT SUCTION CUP COMPLETE VENTOUSE COMPLET

3

CM+9515561304

PUMPENWINKEL PUMP BRACKET EQUERRE DE POMPE

4

CM+9515861301

PUMPENWINKEL (HI), VOLLSTÄNDIG PUMP BRACKET (HI) COMPLETE EQUERRE DE POMPE (HI) COMPLET

5

CM+9037170040


6

CM+0000064155

SILIKONSCHLAUCH (INNENDURCHMESSER 3MM) SILICON TUBE (INNER DIAMETER 3MM) TUYAU SLICONE (DIAMÈTRE INTÉRIEUR 3MM)

7

CM+9515561480

DÜSE NOZZLE BUSE

8

CM+9036260940

FILTER MIT MIKROSIEB FILTER WITH MICRO INSERT FILTRE A MICRO-ORIFICES




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 25


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01*

D221

02 03

D353 D81

D2756

08

04

07

06 05


ERASURE UNIT DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 26


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List


Benennung Description Denomination *

1

CM+9515635000

LÖSCHEINHEIT ERASURE UNIT UNITE D'EFFACEMENT

2

CM+9515635430

ARRETIERBLECH RETAINING PLATE PLAQUE DE RETENUE

3

CM+9515635600

HALTER, LAMPEN KOMPLETT LAMP HOLDER COMPLETE SUPPORT LAMPES COMPLET

4

CM+9514535440

KG2-FILTER FILTER FILTRE

5

CM+9515635851

FASSUNGSLEISTE VERKABELT SOCKET BAR WITH CABLE BARRETTE AVEC CABLE

6

CM+9045065740

FASSUNG 6,35 24V SOCKET 6,35 24V SOCLE 6,35 24V

7

CM+9045065530

HALOGENLAMPE, 12V 100W HALOGEN LAMP, 12V 100W LAMPE HALOGEN, 12V 100W

8

CM+9515535650

DISTANZLEISTE SPACER RAIL LITEAU D’ECARTEMENT


ERASURE UNIT DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 27


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

03 02

04

05

06

CR35-X Type 5158 / 100 CR25.0 Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)


SCAN UNIT PART 1 DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 28




1

CM+9515524451

BOWDENZUG BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION CABLE SOUS-GAINE

2

CM+9515627003

OPTIKBAUGRUPPE LENS ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE

3

CM+9515824251

BÜRSTENHALTEBLECH KOMPLETT BRUSH STRIP COMPLETE BAGUETTE A BROSSES COMPLET

4

CM+9515526502

ANDRUCKWELLE PRESSURE SHAFT ARBRE DE PRESSION

5

CM+9515821000

SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST. SCAN UNIT COMPLETE UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE

6

CM+9514822806

LISA BG KOMPLETT ACRYLIC LIGHT GUIDE ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLAGE CONDUIT DE LUMIÈRE




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 29


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

(GS 442) 02

01

(GS 444) 03

04

D707

05

CR25.0 Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)

5156_chap05_13.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100

Chapter 5 / 30




1

CM+9515621000

SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST. SCAN UNIT COMPLETE UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE

2

CM+9515591402

IR 2-FACH LICHTSCHRANKENSATZ IR 2-WAY LIGHT BARRIER SET JEU PHOTOCELLULE DOUBLE IR

3

CM+9515691300

ABLAGEBLECH OHNE LICHTSCHRANKEN TRAY WITHOUT LIGHT BARRIER RECEPTACLE SANS PHOTOCELL

4

CM+9515526502

ANDRUCKWELLE PRESSURE SHAFT ARBRE DE PRESSION

5

CM+9515621060

FEDERBLECH SPRING METAL SHEET TOLE ELASTIQUE A RESSORT




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100

Chapter 5 / 31


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

08 (GS 410)

02

07

03 04 (M 401) 08 (GS 412)

02 05 06





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 32




1

CM+9988905200

KABEL FL 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1) FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1) CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)

2

CM+9514526680

BUCHSE BUSHING DOUILLE

3

CM+9515526701

ANTRIEBSWELLE DRIVE SHAFT ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT

4

CM+9515526801

ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401) LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401) MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)

5

CM+9515526600

SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTÄNDIG WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET

6

CM+9961124560

ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5 TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5 COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5

7

CM+9515544362

KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1) BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1) CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)

8

CM+9515521251

SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412) STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412) CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 33


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

10

01 (GS 450)

02 08 (GS 410)

03

09 08 (GS 412)

04 05 (M 401)

03 06

07

CR25.0 Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)

5156_chap05_15.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100

Chapter 5 / 34




1

CM+9514622504

PMT-MODUL (GS450) PMT MODULE (GS450) MODULE PMT (GS450)

1

CM+9514622550

PMT-MODUL - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450) PMT MODULE - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450) MODULE PMT - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)

2

CM+9988905200


3

CM+9514526680

BUCHSE BUSHING DOUILLE

4

CM+9515526701

ANTRIEBSWELLE DRIVE SHAFT ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT

5

CM+9515526801

ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401) LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401) MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)

6

CM+9515526600

SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTÄNDIG WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET

7

CM+9961124560

ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5 TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5 COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5

8

CM+9515521251

SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412) STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412) CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)

9

CM+9515544362

KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE

10

CM+9515627002

OPTIKBAUGRUPPE LENS ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100

Chapter 5 / 35


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

06 (M402)

05

01

07 08 (GS 448)

(GS444)

02

03 (GS440)

04





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 36




1

CM+9514526190

FÜHRUNG GUIDE GUIDE

2

CM+9515590902

PIN-DIODEN PIN DIODES PLOTS DIODES

3

CM+9515544341

KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3) FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3) CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)

4

CM+9515544321

KABEL FL 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1) FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1) CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)

5

CM+9514525900

KUPPLUNG VOLLSTÄNDIG CLUTCH COMPLETE ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET

6

CM+9514625100

SCHRITTMOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402) STEPPER MOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402) MOTEUR PAS A PAS ST5709S2608-A (M402)

7

CM+9949965402

GS LS-STATISCH (GS448) LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448) CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)

8

CM+9988905800

KABEL FL 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1) FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1) CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 37


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

02 (M402)

08

11

04

(GS 446)

09 10 (GS 448)

07

01

06 (GS 440)

03*

05

CR25.0 Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)

5156_chap05_17.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100

Chapter 5 / 38


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9047710270

KABEL MIT 2X4P MINI DIN CABLE WITH 2X4P MINI DIN CABLE AVEC 2X4P MINI DIN

2

CM+9514625100

SCHRITTMOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402) STEPPER MOTOR ST5709S2608-A (M402) MOTEUR PAS A PAS ST5709S2608-A (M402)

3

CM+9515524181

4

CM+9515524451

BOWDENZUG BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION CABLE SOUS-GAINE

5

CM+9515544321

KABEL FL 10/8/4POL FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL

6

CM+9515544341

KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL

7

CM+9515590902

PIN-DIODEN PIN DIODES PLOTS DIODES

8

CM+9514525900

KUPPLUNG VOLLSTÄNDIG CLUTCH COMPLETE ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET

9

CM+9949965402

GS LS-STATISCH (GS448) LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448) CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)

10

CM+9988905800


11

CM+9514526190

FÜHRUNG GUIDE GUIDE

*

LICHTLEITER L=850MM FIBRE-OPTIC L=850MM FIBRE OPTIQUE L=850MM




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100

Chapter 5 / 39


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02

03 (M300)

08 06 05 (GS302) (GS304) 07

04 (GS300) 13 (GS312)

10

CR35-X Type 5158/100 (up to SN < 4000) CR25.0 Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000) Type 5156/105 (up to SN < 6500)

09 (GS306)

12 (GS310) 11


CPCI-RACK DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 40




1

CM+9515614001

CPCI-RACK, KOMPLETT CPCI RACK, COMPLETE RACK CPCI, COMPLET

2

CM+9515614054

CPCI-RACK BESTÜCKT CPCI RACK ASSEMBLED RACK CPCI ÉQUIPE

3

CM+9514614250

LÜFTER VERDR. PCI-RACK 250MM (M300) FAN WIRED, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300) VENTILATEUR CABLE, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)

4

CM+9048613420

CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300) CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300) CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)

5

CM+9514614401

EINSCHUB STORAGE KOMPLETT (GS302, GS304) PLUG-IN MODULE STORAGE COMPLETE (GS302, GS304) TIROIR STORAGE COMPLET (GS302, GS304)

6

CM+9048613650

DISKETTENLAUFWERK 3,5" FLOPPY-DISK-DRIVE 3,5" LECTEUR 3,5"

7

CM+9048613540

FESTPLATTE 9,1GB ATLAS V HARDDISK 9,1GB ATLAS V DISQUE DUR 9,1GB ATLAS V

8

CM+9048613570

SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR

9

CM+9514614303

PCI POWER SUPPLY KOMPLETT (GS306) PCI POWER SUPPLY COMPLETE (GS306) PCI BLOC SECTEUR COMPLET (GS306)

10

CM+9515516352

VME GLEITBAHN GENIETET VME SLIDE TRACK RAIL GLISSANT VME

11

CM+9515546700

KABEL NETZ-VME POWER CABLE CORDON D’ALIMENTATION

12

CM+9514614653

EINSCHUB IO-MASTER (GS310) PLUG-IN MODULE IO-MASTER (GS310) TIROIR IO-MASTER (GS310)

13

CM+9514615012

OBERON 3 PCB (GS312) OBERON 3 PCB (GS312) OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)


CPCI-RACK DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 41


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02 07

03

06 05

04

CR35-X Type 5158/100 (as of SN 4000) CR25.0 Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6500)

5158_chap05_19_M.CDR

REVIVE RACK DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 42




1

CM+9515890100

REVIVE PCI-RACK CR35-X REVIVE PCI-RACK CR35-X REVIVE PCI-RACK CR35-X

2

CM+9514614250

LÜFTER VERDR. PCI-RACK 250MM FAN WIRED, PCI-RACK 250MM VENTILATEUR CABLE, PCI-RACK 250MM

3

CM+9514614303

PCI POWER SUPPLY KOMPLETT PCI POWER SUPPLY COMPLETE PCI BLOC SECTEUR COMPLET

4

CM+9514890200

REVIVE PCB REVIVE PCB REVIVE PCB

5

CM+9048614280

IDE HARD DISK IDE HARD DISK IDE HARD DISK

6

CM+9514814900

CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK

7

CM+9515888100

MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3007 MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3007 MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3007


REVIVE RACK DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 43


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

10 02 (GS210)

09 11 (GS220)

13 (SI1-SI4) D2182 D5681

08 (SI201) (SI202)

12 (TR206) 15

03 10

16 (GS230)

14 (SI5)

04 (S203)

17 D707 D707

07 D707

D707

D3227

06 (S201)

05 (S202)

5158_CHAP05_20_M.cdr

POWER UNIT DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 44




1

CM+9515664001

LEISTUNGSEINHEIT POWER UNIT BLOC DE PUISSANCE

2

CM+9515591106

GS SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210) PCB SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210) CI COMMUTATION UNIT D'EFFACEMENT (GS210)

3

CM+9043660590

NETZFILTER 250V/16A MAINS FILTER 250V/16A FILTRE RÉSEAU 250V/16A

4

CM+9515541300

KB WAHLSCHALTER (S203) SELECTOR SWITCH (S203) SELECTEUR (ELECTRIQUE) (S203)

5

CM+9042663040

TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER (S202) CASSETTE UNIT SAFETY SWITCH (S202) PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S202)

6

CM+9045231730

ÜBERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER 14A (S201) OVERCURRENT CIRCUIT BREAK 14A (S201) DISJONCTEUR DE SURCHARGE 14A (S201)

7

CM+9515691000

NETZTEIL 90-264V/24V-1A POWER SUPPLY, 90-264V/24V-1A BLOC SECTEUR, 90-264V/24V-1A

8

CM+9045196090

SICHERUNG T 2A (SI201, SI202) FUSE SLOW-BLOW T 2A (SI201, SI202) INERTIE FUSIBLE T 2A (SI201, SI202)

9

CM+9515664800

TRAFOWINKEL TRANSFORMER BRACKET EQUERRE POUR TRANSFORMATEUR

10

CM+9515541800


11

CM+9515564401

GS CURRENT-SENSE (GS220) PCB CURRENT-SENSE (GS220) CI CONTROLE COURANT (GS220)

12

CM+9515664050

TRANSFORMATOR XBF (TR206) TRANSFORMER (TR206) TRANSFORMATEUR (TR206)

13

CM+9045196040

SICHERUNG T 2,5A (SI1-SI4) FUSE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4) FUSIBLE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)

14

CM+9045197050

SICHERUNG T 6,25A (SI5) FUSE T 6,25A (SI5) FUSIBLE T 6,25A (SI5)

15

CM+9047910160

ABSTANDSHALTER SPACER ECARTEUR

16

CM+9515664502

GS POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230) PCB POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230) CI CARTE INTEGRATION PUIS (GS230)

17

CM+9515541900

KABEL BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310) BUS CABLE 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310) CABLE BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)


POWER UNIT DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 45


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

02

01

03

04

5158_chap05_21.cdr

MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 46




1

CM+9515592202

MODIFIKATIONSKIT ENTLADEBÜRSTE MODIFICATIONS KIT DISCHARGE BRUSH KIT DE MODIFICATIONS BROSSES DE DECHARGEMENT

2

CM+9515592300

MODIFIKATIONSKIT KASSETTENÖFFNER MODIFICATIONS KIT CASSETTE OPENER KIT DE MODIFICATIONS OUVREUSE DE CASSETTES

3

CM+9515510152

CU-FILTER VERPACKT CU FILTER PACKED FILTER CU EMBALLE

4

CM+9514810900

ALU FILTER VERPACKT ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED


MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 47


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02*

14

03*

15

04

10 12

05

11 13

07

06

08 04

08

09 06

07 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR

ADC-C CASSETTES - 35X35 (TYPE 8304/780) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 48


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302

CHIPKARTENHALTER, KOMPL. CHIP CARD HOLDER, COMPLETE PORTE CARTE PUCE, COMPLET

2

CM+9830461600

*

DECKEL GESCHW. COVER WELDED COUVERCLE SOUDE

3

CM+9830460300

*

BODEN VOLLSTÄNDIG BOTTOM ASSY FOND COMPL.

4

CM+9830010032

REITER SLIDE CAVALIER

5

CM+9830030702

RIEGEL RECHTS VOLLSTÄNDIG LATCH RHS COMPLETE VERROU A DROITE COMPLET

6

CM+9832520360


7

CM+9830010340

UMLENKTEIL GUIDE PART PARITE DE RENVOI

8

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

9

CM+9830030802

RIEGEL LINKS VOLLSTÄNDIG LATCH LHS COMPLETE VERROU A GAUCHE COMPLET

10

CM+9830010381

BLATTFEDER RECHTS LEAF SPRING RHS RESSORT A BRANCHES A DROITE

11

CM+9830010391

BLATTFEDER LINKS LEAF SPRING LHS RESSORT A BRANCHES A GAUCHE

12

CM+9830011310

ALULABEL (FILMERKENNUNG) ALU LABLE (FILM DETECTION) ETIQUETTE ALU (DETECTION DE FILM)

13

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

14

CM+9830010552

ABWEISER BESCHICHTET DEFLECTOR DEFLECTEUR

15

CM+9830430110

SCHARNIER HINGE CHARNIERE




CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 49


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02*

14

03*

15

04

10 12

05

11 13

07

06

08 04

08

09 06

07 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 50


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302


2

CM+9830561600

*


3

CM+9830560300

*


4

CM+9830010032


5

CM+9830030702


6

CM+9832520360


7

CM+9830010340


8

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

9

CM+9830030802


10

CM+9830010381


11

CM+9830010391


12

CM+9830011310


13

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

14

CM+9830010552


15

CM+9830430110





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 51


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02*

14

03*

15

04

10 12

05

11 13

07

06

08 04

08

09 06

07 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 52


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302


2

CM+9830761600

*


3

CM+9830760300

*


4

CM+9830010032


5

CM+9830030702


6

CM+9832520360


7

CM+9830010340


8

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

9

CM+9830030802


10

CM+9830010381


11

CM+9830010391


12

CM+9830011310


13

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

14

CM+9830010552


15

CM+9830630110





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 53


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02*

14

03*

15

04

10 12

05

11 13

07

06

08 04

08

09 06

07 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 54


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302


2

CM+9830861600

*

DECKEL GESCHWEISST COVER WELDED COUVERCLE SOUDE

3

CM+9830860300

*


4

CM+9830010032


5

CM+9830030702


6

CM+9832520360


7

CM+9830010340


8

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

9

CM+9830030802


10

CM+9830010381


11

CM+9830010391


12

CM+9830011310


13

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

14

CM+9830010552


15

CM+9830830110





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 55


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02*

14

03*

15

04

10 12

05

11 13

07

06

08 04

08

09 06

07 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 56


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302


2

CM+9830961600

*


3

CM+9830960300

*


4

CM+9830010032


5

CM+9830030702


6

CM+9832520360


7

CM+9830010340


8

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

9

CM+9830030802


10

CM+9830010381


11

CM+9830010391


12

CM+9830011310


13

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

14

CM+9830010552


15

CM+9830930110





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 57


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01

02*

14

03*

15

04

10 12

05

11 13

07

06

08 04

08

09 06

07 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 58


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9831661302

CHIPKARTENHALTER ADC-C 15X30 CHIP CARD HOLDER PORTE CARTE PUCE ADC-C

2

CM+9831661600

*


3

CM+9831660300

*

BODEN VOLLSTÄNDIG BOTTOM COMPLETE FOND COMPLET

4

CM+9830010032


5

CM+9830030702


6

CM+9832520360


7

CM+9830010340


8

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

9

CM+9830030802


10

CM+9830010381


11

CM+9830010391


12

CM+9830011310


13

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

14

CM+9830010552


15

CM+9830530110





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 59


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 60


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302


2

CM+9832061600

*


3

CM+9832060300

*


4

CM+9830030702


5

CM+9832520360


6

CM+9830010340


7

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

8

CM+9830030802


9

CM+9830010381


10

CM+9830010391


11

CM+9830011310


12

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

13

CM+9830430110





CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 61


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43 (43X35) (TYPE 8320/785) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 62


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302


2

CM+9832061600

*


3

CM+9832080300

*


4

CM+9830030702


5

CM+9832520360


6

CM+9830010340


7

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

8

CM+9830030802


9

CM+9830010381


10

CM+9830010391


11

CM+9830011310


12

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

13

CM+9830430110



ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43 (43X35) (TYPE 8320/785) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 63


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43AS (43X35) (TYPE 8320/790) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 64


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List



1

CM+9830461302


2

CM+9832061600

*


3

CM+9832080500

*


4

CM+9830030702


5

CM+9832520360


6

CM+9830010340


7

CM+9830010351

KLINKE PAWL CLIQUET

8

CM+9830030802


9

CM+9830010381


10

CM+9830010391


11

CM+9830011310


12

CM+9830010440

SCHRAUBE SCREW VIS

13

CM+9830430110



ADC-C CASSETTES - 21X43AS (43X35) (TYPE 8320/790) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 65


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

01,02

5158_chap05_31.CDR

CR MAMMO CASSETTE (TYPE 8330/785, 8331/785) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 66




1

CM+9833010000

CR MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CR MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CR MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24

2

CM+9833110000

CR MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30 CR MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30 CR MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30


CR MAMMO CASSETTE (TYPE 8330/785, 8331/785) DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


CR25.0 / CR35-X TYPE 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 67


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

Spare Parts Kit Categories R

'Repair'

Parts required to repair a machine Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock. Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines. Adapt quantity locally depending on: • • • •

I

'Installation'

number of machines extension of the service area local service structure (centralized / decentralized) stockpiling

Parts required to install a machine Kit `I`should be available as case stock. Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts included in the shipment). Quantity covers one single machine installation.

M 'Maintenance'

L

'Local stock'

Parts required to maintain a machine Kit `M` should be available as case stock. Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the maintenance checklist. Quantity covers one single maintenance. Extremely expensive or bulky parts Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse. Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.

Spare Parts Kit Order numbers Order number CM+051560100731

Spare Part Kit CR 25.0 Sortiment R

version

CM+051560100733

CR 25.0 Sortiment M

5

CM+051560100734

CR 25.0 Sortiment L

6

CM+051580100731

CR 35-X Sortiment R

5

CM+051580100733

CR 35-X Sortiment M

5

CM+051580100734

CR 35-X Sortiment L

6

5



CR25.0 / CR35-X Type TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 68


DD+DIS268.08M

Spare Parts List

Type Overview This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s): Device Name

Type No.

Specification

CR 25.0

5156/0105

AS OF SN 6000

CR 35-X

5158/0100

ALL SERIAL NUMBERS

CR 25.0

5156/0100

UP TO SN < 6000

Accessory Overview Following accesssories are separately available: Order number

Accessory MOBILE KIT

EBYO1

PROSAT WIPERS

ETRTM



CR25.0 / CR35-X Type TYPE5156/0100/0105/5158/0100 5156/100/105, 5158/100

Chapter 5 / 69


HEALTHCARE

Chapter 6

Accessories

Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Content of Chapter 6: Accessories This chapter contains the instructions for all accessories (options): Document No.

Contents

Edition. Revision

DD+DIS222.06E

Fitting Instructions for the Mobile Kit

1.0

DD+DIS025.05E

Technical Documentation for the CR User Station

4.0

DD+DIS180.05M

Spare Parts List for the CR User Station

n.a.


03-2007 printed in Germany

Document Node ID: 13075691 eq_06_accessories_toc_e_template_v02



HEALTHCARE

Accessories

Global Services Organisation

Order-No.: DD+DIS222.06E

CR 35-X

*16BY9U1*

Type 5158

1 Piece 6BY9U MA1

CR 25.0

F7.5155.9024.0 (only needed for production purpose)

Type 5156

ADC SOLO Type 5155

Fitting Instructions for the Mobile Kit CM+9 5155 9500 x This fitting instruction is also enclosed to the accessory “Mobile Kit”. This document describes the installation of the Mobile Kit, which is necessary to fix the digitizer on deck when in mobile use.

Necessary time: approx. 1 hour

Necessary tools: • 5 mm Allen key • 6 mm Allen key • 7 mm socket wrench • 10 mm wrench • 13 mm wrench

This fitting instruction replaces DD+DIS233.05E. CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

printed in Germany


Document Node ID: 12403685 eq_06_accessories_e_template_v01


DD+DIS222.06E

Accessories

List of contents 1

General Information .....................................................................1

1.1

Introduction .......................................................................................... 1

1.2

Scope of Delivery ................................................................................. 1

1.3

Preparation ........................................................................................... 2

2

Installation Procedure..................................................................2

2.1

Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket ...................................................... 2

3

Adjust the Ground Plate ..............................................................3

3.1

Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket ....................... 3

3.2

Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer........................................... 4

3.3

Fix the Digitizer to the wall .................................................................. 4

3.4

Security Fix of the Scan Unit............................................................... 5


Edition 1, Revision 0

CR 35-X Type 5158


DD+DIS222.06E

Accessories

1

General Information

1.1

Introduction Provided with a mobile kit the digitizer can be installed in a van, in a container or in a vessel. This mobile installation kit is used to fix the machine on deck. Mobile Kit: Type Number: 5155 / 153 ABC Code: EBYO1 Spare Parts No.: CM+ 9.5155.9500.x

1.2

Scope of Delivery • 1 safety bar with screw (1A) length: 655 mm • 1 safety bar with screw (1B) length: 605 mm

1

CR (A)

• 1 mounting block (2).

+ 25 CR ) (B

LO SO

3

2

• 1 wall mounting bracket with 2 quick action locks (3). • 1 bolt with split pin (4).

35

C AD

4 5

• 1 mounting bracket to be fixed to the digitizer (6 screws) (5). • 1 ground plate with mounting bracket (6). • 1 set of installation instructions.

6

5158_reg06_001.cdr

figure 1



CR 35-X Type 5158


DD+DIS222.06E

Accessories

1.3

Preparation • Examine thoroughly the path along which the digitizer has to be moved until it reaches its final location, to guarantee sufficient space to pass all the doors. • Make sure that the final location is solid enough to carry the digitizer. Read carefully the Installation Planning Instructions, chapter 11.

2

Installation Procedure

2.1

Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket (1)

Remove the side panels of the digitizer.

(2)

Loosen the paneling screws on the rear of the digitizer.

CAUTION: The scan unit may be damaged. Take care that none of the elements 5155P2-A.CDR fixing the paneling screw figure 2 (1 small and 1 large washer, 1 retaining ring, 1 nut) can fall into the digitizer.

(3)

Fix the mounting block to the digitizer with a 5 mm Allen key. Please use the two screw sets supplied, consisting of 1 allen screw, 1 washer, 1 retaining ring and one nut each.

(4)

Fix the mounting block to the wall mounting bracket with the quick action locks.

figure 3



CR 35-X Type 5158


DD+DIS222.06E

3

Accessories

Adjust the Ground Plate

3.1

(1)

Position the ground plate as close as possible to the place where the digitizer is expected to remain located.

(2)

Move the digitizer onto the ground plate.

(3)

Insert the bolt into the guide slot of the mounting bracket provided to fix the digitizer on the ground plate.

(4)

Make sure that the mounting block touches the wall mounting bracket.

(5)

The mounting bracket of the ground plate should be approximately in the middle position while the screws are not fixed. Now the ground plate is in the perfect position.

(6)

Mark the corners of the ground plate with a pencil.

5155P1-C.CDR

figure 4

Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket (1)

Remove the bolt from the guide slot and move the digitizer down from the ground plate.

(2)

Select a minimum of 4 holes in the ground plate where you want to fix it to the floor. You may be guided by the conditions of the floor where the digitizer is being located.

(3)

Fix the ground plate to the floor.

(4)

Select a minimum of 4 holes in the wall mounting bracket. You may be guided by the conditions of the wall where the digitizer is being fixed.

(5)

Fix the wall mounting bracket to the wall.

(6)

Examine the solidness of the fixed wall mounting bracket and the fixed ground plate.



CR 35-X Type 5158


DD+DIS222.06E

Accessories

3.2

Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer (1)

Lift the digitizer to an angle which allows you to fix the mounting bracket to the digitizer. Use the 10 mm wrench to fix the mounting bracket tightly (6 screws).

5155P3-A.CDR

figure 5

3.3

Fix the Digitizer to the Wall (1)

Move the digitizer onto the ground plate again and insert the mounting block into the wall mounting bracket.

figure 6

(2)

Connect the mounting block to the wall mounting bracket with the quick action locks again. Now screw the quick action locks to the perfect length. The perfect length is reached when the lock snaps softly into the locking position.

figure 7



CR 35-X Type 5158


DD+DIS222.06E

Accessories

(3)

Insert the bolt into the guide slot and the mounting bracket of the digitizer. This locks the digitizer to the ground plate.

(4)

Attach the split pin to the provided hole of the bolt.

(5)

Fix the 4 screws thoroughly to connect the mounting bracket firmly to the ground plate.

figure 8

3.4

Security Fix of the Scan Unit If the digitizer is being used in a mobile location, the scan unit has to be fixed additionally. (1) Insert the safety bar into the provided guides (A) and fix it with the 7 mm socket wrench (B).

A

B

5158_reg06_002.cdr

figure 9



CR 35-X Type 5158


HEALTHCARE Global Services Organisation

Technical Documentation

Order-No.: DD+DIS025.05E

*1YNCFV1* 1 Piece YNCFV MA1

CR User Station Type 5157 / 100

4th Edition

This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS025.05E This document contains the technical documentation for the CR User Station. It describes the installation, function and troubleshooting of the CR User Station as well as the technical data. The CR User Station is an accessory of the CR 25.0 and the CR 75.0 digitizers. This document is part of the service documentation for the CR 25.0 (DD+DIS071.04E) and for the CR 75.0 (DD+DIS002.04E).


printed in Germany 2006-03-27 Agfa Company Confidential

CAUTION: This system uses mains voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations. The adjustments and routines described in this document must only be performed by qualified technical personnel.

NOTE: Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician. Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician. CE Declaration: According to the medical guidelines the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.

We reserve the right to technical changes

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

List of Contents 1

Introduction ..................................................................................1

2

Safety Instructions .......................................................................3

2.1

General Safety Instructions ........................................................................... 3

2.2

Safety Precautions for the Monitor ............................................................... 4

2.3

Safety Instructions for Cleaning the CR User Station ................................. 4

2.4

Relevant Warning Label ................................................................................. 5

2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2

Safety Compliance.......................................................................................... 6 CR User Station ................................................................................................ 6 ID Tablet ........................................................................................................... 6

3

Installation Instructions...............................................................7

3.1

Mounting to the Base Plate............................................................................ 7

3.2

Removing the ID Tablet from the CR User Station ...................................... 8

3.3

Installing Hub and Uninteruptible Power Supply (UPS) .............................. 8

3.4

Installing Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse...................................................... 9

3.5

Re-Installing the ID Tablet............................................................................ 11

3.6

Selecting Power settings ............................................................................. 12

3.7

Connections and Grids ................................................................................ 14

3.8

Docking the CRUS to a CR 25.0 Digitizer ................................................... 15

3.9

Exchanging the Monitor Rack ..................................................................... 17

3.10

Adjusting the Monitor................................................................................... 21

4

Functional Description ..............................................................22

4.1

Components of the CR User Station ........................................................... 22

4.2

Standard Workflow with the CR User Station ............................................ 23

4.3

Direct ID Workflow with the CR User Station ............................................. 24

5

Troubleshooting .........................................................................24

6

Spare Parts List ..........................................................................25

7

Maintenance................................................................................25


2006-03-27


Page I Agfa Company Confidential

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

8

Installation Planning.................................................................. 26

8.1

Continuous Operation...................................................................................26

8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3

Dimensions ....................................................................................................26 CR User Station as stand-alone Device ..........................................................26 CR User Station with CR 25.0 .........................................................................27 CR User Station with CR 75.0 .........................................................................28 Technical Data ...............................................................................................29

8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4

Connections...................................................................................................30 Mains Fuse Protection.....................................................................................30 Operating Voltage ...........................................................................................30 ID Tablet..........................................................................................................31 Connection Cables ..........................................................................................31


Page II Agfa Company Confidential


2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

1

CR User Station

Introduction The CR User Station (CRUS) is a new operating console that facilitates the work of the radiographer. It is suitable for all CR environments: centralized, decentralized or personal CR solutions. It has been designed for the use with the digitizers CR 25.0 and CR 75.0. Its modular ergonomic design offers space for: • a PC which handles, processes and dispatches images, • an LCD monitor, • mouse and keyboard, • a network switch or hub, • an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), and • cassette storage.

The CRUS can be installed as a stand-alone configuration, working together with a CR 25.0 or CR 75.0 digitizer.

figure 1


2006-03-27


Page 1 Agfa Company Confidential

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

For an optimal workflow the CRUS can also be docked directly to the CR 25.0. The CRUS can not be docked directly to the CR 75.0.

figure 2 This documentation includes the safety instructions, the instructions for the mechanical installation, and technical data of the CRUS. As the CRUS is maintenance-free, there are no maintenance instructions or checklists available.

NOTE: For all information concerning the digitizers the CRUS can be attached to, please refer to the relevant service documentation: CR 25.0:

Order number DD+DIS071.04E or in MedNet: GSO Library / Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 25.0

CR 75.0:

Order number DD+DIS002.04E or in MedNet: GSO Library / Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 75.0




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

2

Safety Instructions

2.1

General Safety Instructions •

The CRUS complies with the EN 60950 standard for Information Technology. This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact with the equipment. Therefore, the operator console must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m around the patient.

•

Perform no other operations on the CRUS than those described in this document.

•

Pay attention when working near the pedestal: the foot projects slightly and could be tripped on. When rolling the pedestal away from its position, take care not to pull or put any strain on power or network leads.

•

When moving the CRUS, take care that it remains stable at all times. In particular, the following considerations should be kept in mind: the nature of the floor and any floor-coverings, carpets, etc.; any obstructions such as cables; any slopes to be negotiated.

•

To avoid collisions and instability the monitor must be turned over the ID Tablet when moving longer distances, as shown below:

figure 3


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

•

Make sure that the two safety caps are mounted on top of the right side rollers in case of stand-alone CRUS (this means that the CRUS is not connected to a CR 25.0 Digitizer), as shown below:

figure 4

2.2

2.3

Safety Precautions for the Monitor •

The monitor must be fixed on the monitor arm with screws.

•

If the monitor arm is re-positioned in a different height, the lock must be closed.

Safety Instructions for Cleaning the CR User Station •

Pull the power plug out of the CRUS prior to cleaning the equipment and switch off the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) if installed.




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

2.4

CR User Station

Relevant Warning Label

Pay attention to the warning label at the rear side of the CRUS: Check power selection before connecting to mains

figure 5


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

2.5

Safety Compliance

2.5.1

CR User Station •

the general safety regulations EN 60950, EN 60601-1-2, and UL 60950,

•

CSA C22.2 No. 60950,

•

the radio interference regulations EN 55022:1997, Class B and FCC 47, Part 15, Subchapter B, Class A.

The safety compliance is only guaranteed by using equipment supplied by Agfa (refer to ‘Technical specifications’ on page 21 of the User Manual 2313). Using other equipment will void the safety compliance. In combination with a digitizer the isolating transformer assures that the digitizer still complies with EN 60601-1-1 medical, electrical systems.

The CR User Station bears the CE mark and fully complies with the CE Directive 89/336/EEC and with the federal code of the United States, bearing on: • Emission and immunity according to EN 60601-1-2, for emissions the equipment complies with EN 55011 class A (CISPR 11). This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

2.5.2

•

Emissions according to 47 CFR part 15 subpart B, Class A. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

•

Radio-parameters of the ID Tablet according to ETS 300330.

ID Tablet •

UL 60950, Third Edition,

•

CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 60950, Third Edition (cUL),

•

EN 60950 1:2001

•

TÜV certified.




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

3


3.1

Mounting to the Base Plate NOTE: The actions described in this section apply only, if the CRUS is installed as stand-alone device. Skip this section if you want to dock it to a CR 25.0 digitizer.

(1)

Put base plate on the ground at the final position of the CRUS.

(2)

Move the unequipped CRUS onto it.

figure 6 (3)

Screw four Phillips screws slightly to the thread nuts of the base plate. Attend that the base plate does not bend up by tightening the screws.

figure 7 (4)

Mount safety caps on top of the right side rollers.


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

3.2

Removing the ID Tablet from the CR User Station (1)

Loosen the Phillips screw (see circle).

(2)

Pull the ID Tablet to the front and lift it off carefully (see arrow).

(3)

Unplug the power supply and the connection to the control PC. figure 9

3.3

Installing Hub and Uninteruptible Power Supply (UPS) (1)

Unscrew the two grids at the rear side of the CRUS.

(2)

Insert the hub (A) from above between the brackets at the rear wall.

A B C

(3)

Pass the mains cable of the hub through the cut of the front bracket (B), plug it in the hub and fix the bracket with two screws (5.5 mm, C).

(4)

Insert the UPS

(5)

Plug in the power cable of the UPS to the isolating transformer.

(6)

Connect the power cables of control PC, ID tablet and monitor to the UPS.

(7)

Push the feet of the UPS in the four borings at the bottom (arrows; the fourth boring is hidden by the UPS).

C

figure 10

figure 11




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

(8)

Apply foam to the bracket (figure 12) and fix it with four screws to the furniture (figure 13).

figure 12

figure 13 Result

3.4

Hub and UPS are installed in the CRUS.

Installing Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse (1)

Insert the monitor arm (A) in the socket (B) and fix it with the Allen screw (C, 5 mm) at the desired height.

figure 14


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

NOTE: By default, a rack for the Barco monitor is installed. If you have a Barco monitor, go directly to step (2). If you have another monitor, exchange the rack before proceeding with step (2). The exchange of the rack for the NEC monitor is described in section 3.9.

(2)

Unpack the monitor and fix it to the monitor rack with screws (see arrows).

NOTE: figure 15 is an example. Installations of other monitors, e.g. with adapter plates, may look different. figure 15 (3)

Adjust the monitor according to section 3.10.

(4)

Put keyboard and mouse into their predefined position.

figure 16




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

Result

3.5

CR User Station

(5)

Unscrew the cable duct at the monitor arm (two Phillips screws).

(6)

Pass the cable in the duct and close it.

(7)

Place the monitor adapter beside the UPS and connect it to the monitor and the power supply.

(8)

Install other cables as usual with PC installations. Pass the cables accurately in the provided cable ducts.

figure 17

Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse are installed in the CRUS.

Re-Installing the ID Tablet (1)

Reconnect the ID tablet: Connect the power supply (B) and the connection to the control PC.

A

B

NOTE: With workstation software ADC QS 2.1 use the serial RS232 connection (A). With CR QS 3.0 or higher use the USB connection (C). (2)

B C

Put the ID tablet back to its place and fix the Phillips screw (see figure 9, circle).

figure 18


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

(3)

Fix the two cassette brackets beneath the ID tablet.

figure 19

3.6

Selecting Power settings You find the possible primary voltages with the corresponding currents for the fuses at the rear side of the CRUS: 100 V: 120 V 230 V 240 V

6.3 AT 5.0 AT 2.5 AT 2.5 AT

figure 20




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

(1)

Take out the plastic bushing above the power socket.

figure 21 (2)

Check that both fuses have current values which fit the local mains voltage. If fuses must be changed, take the appropriate fuses from the accessory pack.

figure 22 Take out the adjustment element and insert it with the country-specific voltage at the left side (230 V in the example). 20

100

2 01

(3)

240

figure 23


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

(4)

Check that the correct mains voltage is visible in the small window of the plastic bushing (230 V in the example). figure 24

(5) Result

3.7

Put the plastic bushing back.

The power settings are adjusted.

Connections and Grids (1)

Connect the network cable of the digitizer to the hub of the CRUS.

(2)

Connect the CRUS to the hospital network.

(3)

Reinstall both rear grids.

NOTE: If you want to dock the CRUS to a CR 25.0 digitizer, continue with section 3.8.

Result

The installation of the CRUS as a stand-alone device is finished. Connect it to the mains.




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

3.8

CR User Station

Docking the CRUS to a CR 25.0 Digitizer (1)

Fix the sticky tape to the side panel facing the digitizer (arrows).

figure 25 (2)

Move the CRUS to its final position next to the digitizer.

figure 26


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

(3)

Position the attaching plate in such a way, that the axis of the wheel of the digitizer is caught.

figure 27 (4)

Swivel attaching plate by 90° and fasten two Phillips screws at the CRUS side panel. This connection prevents the CRUS from unintended moving.

figure 28 (5)

Turn the wheels of the CRUS inwards and lock the brakes.

figure 29

Result

(6)

Place the side cover such that the cutout (see arrow) is on the upper side.

(7)

Mount the side cover with two screws (7 mm, circles).

(8)

Connect the CRUS to the mains.

figure 30

The CRUS is installed and docked to the CR 25.0. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.



2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

3.9

CR User Station

Exchanging the Monitor Rack By default, the CRUS is equipped with the monitor rack for the Barco monitor (see figure 31). If you have a NEC monitor, you will have to exchange the monitor rack. For this, follow the instructions in this section.

figure 31 (1)

Unscrew the lever (Allen key, size 4) and remove it.

figure 32 (2)

Unscrew the quick opening device with your hand.

figure 33


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

NOTE: The monitor rack, the bearing and the washers can easily fall down! Be careful when removing the axis.

(3)

Push the axis out of its bearing. figure 34

(4)

Remove monitor rack, bearing and two washers from the retainer.

figure 35




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

NOTE: If the monitor rack is not fixed properly, it may tilt unwanted. Check that the hole of the retainer (see circle) and the form of the axis fit smoothly together. figure 37 figure 36 (5)

Align the bearing with the NEC monitor rack.

figure 38 (6)

Fix the monitor rack with the axis on the retainer. The arrows indicate the places for the washers.

figure 39


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

(7)

Screw the quick opening device into the lever.

figure 40 (8)

Screw the quick opening device with the lever back onto the end of the axis.

figure 41 Result

The monitor rack is exchanged.




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

3.10

CR User Station

Adjusting the Monitor Adjust the inclination of the monitor by using the lever at the rear side:

NOTE: The lever is a quick-fix system: Its fixed or loose position can be changed when it is pulled (lever free, see figure 42). There is no need to open the Allen screw at the axis for the adjustment of the monitor.

(1)

Support the monitor by holding it at the bottom side.

(2)

Loosen lever by turning counter-clockwise.

(3)

Adjust the inclination.

(4)

Fix the lever by turning clockwise.

lever free

lever locked

loose fixed

figure 42


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

4


4.1

Components of the CR User Station

monitor * keyboard *

mouse support

top storage rack

ID tablet side storage racks

case

figure 43: The * indicates devices which are not included in the CRUS delivery

Components

Additional devices

The CRUS consists of the following components: •

an operator console which provides place for keyboard and mouse,

•

a monitor arm,

•

an integrated ID tablet,

•

a top storage rack for up to six cassettes,

•

two side storage racks for up to five cassettes each,

•

an isolating transformer (inside the case), and

•

a case which contains the ID tablet and the isolation transformer.

The CRUS offers space for the following devices which are not included in the delivery of the CRUS: •

a PC which handles, processes and dispatches images,

•

an LCD monitor (flat-screen),

•

mouse and keyboard,

•

a network switch or hub, and

•

an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

4.2

CR User Station

Standard Workflow with the CR User Station

B

C

A

D

figure 44 Together with a digitizer the CRUS offers an optimum workflow: (1)

Up to five exposed cassettes are stored in the upper side storage rack (A).

(2)

The exposed cassettes are then identified in the ID Tablet (B).

(3)

The exposed and identified cassettes are inserted directly into the digitizer or, if the digitizer is busy, stored in the top storage rack (C).

(4)

The scanned and erased cassettes waiting to be used again are stored in the lower side storage rack (D).


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

4.3

Direct ID Workflow with the CR User Station In order to save time it is also possible to use the CRUS for Direct ID workflow: • An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.

5

•

The digitizer recognizes that the cassette is not identified and opens a communication to the control PC in the CRUS.

•

The digitizer starts scanning the image plate and sends an ID Data Request Message to the control PC. On the monitor the ID Viewer window pops up for user entry of the ID data.

•

The control PC sends the complete ID data to the digitizer.

Troubleshooting Symptom

The control PC shuts down automatically or does not start up. The UPS is either off or it is beeping. In the latter case the On Battery indicator is blinking.

Defect

A fuse in the isolating transformer is defect.

Solution

Check fuses and replace them if necessary. Three fuses are installed at the isolating transformer in the CRUS: •

One fuse is located inside the fuse box (A), 2.0 AT for 500 V, (CM+9 0451 9609 0)

•

A

B

Two fuses are located inside the plastic bushing of the voltage adjustment (B). The fuses must be appropriate for the country-specific voltage: figure 45 2.5 AT for 230 – 240 V 5.0 AT for 120 V 6.3 AT for 100 V

(CM+9 0451 9604 0) (CM+9 0452 3188 0) (CM+9 0452 3187 0)

WARNING: Overload of the isolation transformer may lead to fire hazard! Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated above.




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

Symptom

Defect Solution

CR User Station

The ID Viewer application at the control PC does not pop up if a cassette is inserted in the ID tablet. The main switch (arrow) of the ID tablet does not shine green, i.e. it is off. Check if the main switch of the ID tablet shines green.

figure 46

6

Spare Parts List For the Spare Parts List refer to the document DD+DIS180.05M.

7

Maintenance The CRUS does not need maintenance.


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

8


8.1

Continuous Operation The device is suitable for continuous operation.

8.2

Dimensions

8.2.1

CR User Station as stand-alone Device Height

1010 mm (39.8’’)

Height with monitor arm and 19” monitor

1710 mm (67.3’’)

Width without cassette rack

320 mm (12.6’’)

Depth

650 mm (25.6’’)

Footprint

with racks: 530 x 650 mm (20.9’’ x 25.6’’) without racks: 520 x 650 mm (20.5’’ x 25.6’’)




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E 8.2.2

CR User Station CR User Station with CR 25.0 Required free space for optimum operation (all dimensions in cm (inch)):

193 (75”) 5 (2”) 5 (2”)

43 (17”)

45 (18”)

100 (40”)

64 (25”)

120 (47”)

200 (77”)

75 (30”)

Digitizer

figure 47


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

8.2.3

CR User Station with CR 75.0 Required free space for optimum operation (all dimensions in cm (inch)):

10 (4”)

203 (79”)

5 (2”)

5 (2”) 64 (25”)

Digitizer

127 (48”)

200 (77”)

68 (27”)

61 (23”)

43 (17”)

figure 48




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E

8.3

CR User Station

Technical Data Weight Empty

53 kg

Fully equipped

approx. 100 kg

Operating Conditions Temperature

10°C – 30°C

Change of temperature

0.5°C / min.

Relative humidity

15% – 80%

Specifications of the Isolating Transformer Power input, switchable (primary winding)

100 V AC / 120 V AC / 230 V AC / 240 V AC

Power output (secondary winding)

230 V AC

Dimensions

220 mm x 170 mm x 200 mm (8.7’’ x 6.7’’ x 7.9’’) (H x W x D)

Specifications of the integrated ID Tablet Input voltage

100 – 240 V AC; 5 V DC

Frequency

50 – 60 Hz

Classification

Class III


2006-03-27



DD+DIS025.05E

CR User Station

Type Label You find the type label at the rear side of the CRUS.

figure 49

8.4

Connections

8.4.1

Mains Fuse Protection Mains Fuse Protection of CRUS 100 V

6,3 A, slow blow

120 V

5,0 A, slow blow

230 – 240 V

2,5 A, slow blow

Mains Fuse Protection of Wall Outlet

8.4.2

Europe

16 A, slow blow

USA & Japan

15 A, slow blow

Operating Voltage 100 V

+ 10%

120 V

+ 10%

230 – 240 V

+ 10%




2006-03-27

DD+DIS025.05E 8.4.3

CR User Station ID Tablet The ID Tablet has • a 5 V DC power supply,

8.4.4

•

a RS232 Interface and

•

an USB connector.

Connection Cables The following cables are included as standard delivery. Mains cable

I-2500-S

Mains cable

5-15P/IEC 320 C13

Serial cable

RS232 cable 1-1UL VW1, 2 m


2006-03-27



Copyright  AGFA GEVAERT HealthCare, DD+DIS025.05E All rights reserved Published by Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare Tegernseer Landstraße 161 D - 81539 München

Technical modifications reserved AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert


HEALTHCARE

Imaging Services

Ersatzteilliste Spare Parts List Liste des Pièces de Rechange

Order No.: DD+DIS180.05M

CR User Station Type 5157/0100/0200

1 Piece YV)VH MA1

WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries. INSTRUCTION: 1. Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document This system uses main voltage. Please considerGSO the respective safety regulations. (see MEDNET => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => These instructions descibre Publications adjustments and routines which must only beprior performed by to attempting any operation, => Service Manual) qualified technical personnel. repair or maintenance task on the equipment. Note: 2. Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and onelectrician. the product. Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified Caution:

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician. CE Declaration: According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.

Attention: De la tension secteur est présente dans ce système. Observez toutes les précautions de sécurité. Ce manuel contient des procédures et des réglages à l' attention exclusive de spécialistes du service après-vente. Note: Seul un spécialiste est autorisé à effectuer les branchements électriques et les réparations. Seul un spécialiste est autorisé à effectuer les branchements mécaniques et les réparations. Explication CE: D'après les directives médicales l'explication CE (conformité CE) expire dès que ce produit est modifié sans autorisation de son fabricant! Valable pour toutes les pièces et non seulement pour les éléments de sécurité!

5157_0100_TITEL.CDR

Die Ersatzteilliste ist gesondert lieferbar: Bestellnummer DD+DIS180.05M

Änderungen von Daten und Eigenschaften, die dem technischen Fortschritt dienen, vorbehalten. We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical progress. Sous réserve de modifications de données et de caractéristiques pouvant servir au progrès technique.

The spare parts list is available separately. Order number DD+DIS180.05M La liste des pièces détachées est à votre disposition séparément: No. de Ref. DD+DIS180.05M internal update #: 3 CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.

printed in Germany 03-2007


Document Node ID: 14578088 Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare


Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Inhaltsverzeichnis - Contents - Table de matières

External Partners: For ordering spare parts contact your local AGFA representative. LEISTUNGSEINHEIT POWER UNIT MODULE DE PUISSANCE SEITE / PAGE 8 - 9

ID STATION ID STATION ID STATION SEITE / PAGE 6 - 7

Please refer to: www.agfa.com => HealthCare => ABOUT US => Agfa HealthCare worldwide

For Recycling information refer to: http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf GESTELL FRAME CHÂSSIS SEITE / PAGE 4 - 5

WARNING: Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation. Replace defective parts with Agfa® HealthCare original spare parts. Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the respective procedure.


Chapter 5 / 2 03-2007

Type 5157/0100/0200 CR User Station




Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Ersatzteilliste / Spare Parts List / Liste des Pièces de Rechange




Chapter 5 / 3 03-2007

Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

08 06 05

09

07

04

03*

02

01 5157_0100_8001.CDR


Chapter 5 / 4 03-2007

GESTELL FRAME CHÂSSIS TYPE 5157/0100/0200 CR User Station



Spare Parts List



1

CM+9515777350

LENKROLLE MIT FESTSTELLER MONT. GUIDE ROLLER WITH ARRESTING LEVER INSATLLED ROUE GUIDE AVEC LEVIER DE BLOCAGE MONTER

2

CM+9515777250

LENKROLLE MONT. GUIDE ROLLER INSTALLED ROUE GUIDE MONTER

3

CM+9515778120

4

CM+9515778151

ABLAGE TRAY RANGEMENT

5

CM+9515777420

MONITORWINKEL MONITOR BRACKET - (FOR BARCO MONITOR) EQUERRE DU MONITEUR

6

CM+9515777921

ZWISCHENPLATTE INTERMEDIATE PLATE - (FOR NEC MONITOR) PLAQUE D'ECARTEMENT

7

CM+9039901130


8

CM+9039000290

ENTRIEGELUNGSGRIFF RELEASE HANDLE POIGNEE DE DÉERROUILLAGE

9

CM+9037160600

GUMMIKAPPE RUBBER FOOT PIED CAOUTCHOUC

99

CM+9515791000

VERPACKUNG CR USER STATION PACKING CR USER STATION EMBALLAGE CR USER STATION

*

HALTEWINKEL SUPPORT BRACKET EQUERRE DE MAINTIEN

=Assembly D =Standardised part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standardised parts "DD+DIS011.93M" * =Spare part not available from stock. Expect extended delivery time.




GESTELL FRAME CHÂSSIS TYPE 5157/0100/0200 CR User Station

Chapter 5 / 5 03-2007

Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

01*

07 08

02 04

05

06

05 03 5157_0100_8002.CDR


Chapter 5 / 6 03-2007

ID STATION ID STATION ID STATION TYPE 5157/0100/0200 CR User Station



Spare Parts List


Benennung Description Denomination *

1

CM+9515777750

VERKLEIDUNG KASSETTENEINGABE PANELING CASSETTE INPUT REVÊTEMENT INTRODUCTION CASSETTE

2

CM+9516211601

HF-PLATINE HF BOARD HF DISQUE

3

CM+9516211807

DIGITALPLATINE DIGITAL BOARD DIGITAL DISQUE

4

CM+9516212101

RESET PLATINE RESET BOARD RESET DISQUE

5

CM+9516290200

FLACHBANDKABEL RIBBON CABLE CABLE RUBAN

6

CM+9047710950

RS232-KABEL RS232 CABLE CABLE RS232

7

CM+9048613960

NETZMODUL 24V/1,3A PMA30S24 POWER SUPPLY 24V/1,3A PMA30S24 BLOC D'ALIMENTATION 24V/1,3A PMA30S24

8

CM+9047710960

USB-A-B KABEL USB-A-B CABLE CABLE USB-A-B





ID STATION ID STATION ID STATION TYPE 5157/0100/0200 CR User Station

Chapter 5 / 7 03-2007

Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

02 01

03,04,05

5157_0100_8003.CDR


Chapter 5 / 8 03-2007

LEISTUNGSEINHEIT POWER UNIT MODULE DE PUISSANCE TYPE 5157/0100/0200 CR User Station



Spare Parts List



1

CM+9515777711

TRENNTRAFO TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMATEUR

2

CM+9045196090

SICHERUNG T 2A FUSE SLOW-BLOW T 2A INERTIE FUSIBLE T 2A

3

CM+9045196040

SICHERUNG T 2,5A FUSE T 2,5A FUSIBLE T 2,5A

4

CM+9045231880

SICHERUNG (T 5A) UL - 6,3X32MM FUSE (T 5A) FUSIBLE (T 5A)

5

CM+9045231870

SICHERUNG (T 6,25A) FUSE (T 6,25A) FUSIBLE (T 6,25A)





LEISTUNGSEINHEIT POWER UNIT MODULE DE PUISSANCE TYPE 5157/0100/0200 CR User Station

Chapter 5 / 9 03-2007

Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Empfohlene Ersatzteilsortimente Ersatzteilsortimente repräsentieren eine Auswahl wichtiger Teile aus der Ersatzteilliste.

Sortimentskategorien R

'Repair'

Teilebedarf zur Reparatur des Geräts. Dieses Sortiment sollte der Techniker im Auto mitführen "Car Stock". Die Mengen decken den Bedarf für bis zu 10 Geräte. Lokal individuelle Mengenanpassungen vornehmen in Abhängigkeit von: - Anzahl der Geräte - Größe des Servicegebiets - Servicestruktur (zentral/dezentral) - Bevorratungszeit

I

'Installation'

Teilebedarf zur Installation des Geräts. Dieses Sortiment sollte als Kofferlager zur Verfügung stehen. Es enthält alle gerätespezifischen Teile die zusätzlich zu den Teilen des Gerätelieferumfangs zur Durchführung einer Installation benötigt werden. Die Mengen reichen für eine einzige Geräteinstallation.

M

'Maintenance'

Teilebedarf zur Wartung des Geräts. Dieses Sortiment sollte als Kofferlager zur Verfügung stehen. Dieses Sortiment muss für eine Wartung zur Verfügung stehen. Es enthält alle gerätespezifischen Teile die zur Durchführung einer Wartung nach Wartungscheckliste benötigt werden. Die Mengen reichen für eine einzige Wartung.

L

'Local stock'

Extrem teure oder sperrige Teile die im Zentrallager des Landes anstatt im R-Sortiment zur Verfügung stehen sollten. Strategischer Bestand unabhängig von der Anzahl der Geräteinstallationen. Falls diese Teile Bestandteil des Serviceabkommens sind müssen sie nach Verwendung umgehend wieder auf Lager gelegt werden.


Chapter 5 / 10 03-2007




Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Recommended Spare Parts Assortments Spare Parts Assortments represent a selection of important parts out of the Spare Parts List.

Categories of Assortments R

'Repair'

Parts required to repair a machine. This assortment should be available in the field service engineers` car stock Quantity covers requirements for up to 10 machines. Adapt the locally required individual amount depending on: - number of machines - extension of the service area - service structure (centralized/decentralized) - stockpiling

I

'Installation'

Parts required to install a machine. This assortment should be available in a suitcase. It includes all machine specific parts required to perform the installation in addition to the parts included in the shipment. Quantity covers one single machine installation

M

'Maintenance'

Parts required to maintain a machine. This assortment should be available in a suitcase. This assortment must be available during a maintenance job, it includes all machine specific parts required to perform a maintenance according to the Maintenance check list. Quantity covers one single maintenance.

L

'Local stock'

Extremely expensive or bulky parts which should be kept in the country central warehouse instead of the R assortment. Strategic stock quantity is independent of the installed base. If service contract obligations refer to these parts, they must be replenished immediately.





Chapter 5 / 11 03-2007

Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Assortiments de pièces détachées Les assortiments suivants représentent une sélection de pièces essentielles extraites de la liste de pièces détachées.

Catégories d’assortiments R

'Repair'

Pièces requises pour la réparation de l’appareil. Le technicien devrait avoir cet assortiment dans son véhicule ( = Carstock) Cette quantité est suffisante pour la réparation de 10 appareils. Adapter les quantités sur place d’après les critères : - nombre d’appareils - extension de la zone d’intervention - structure du service technique (centralisation/décentralisation) - temps d’approvisionnement

I

'Installation'

Pièces requises pour l’installation de l'appareil. Cet assortiment devrait être disponible dans une mallette. Il contient toutes les pièces spécifiques à l’appareil requises pour effecteur l'installation en plus des pièces incluses dans la fourniture. La quantité recouvre les besoins pour l’installation d’un seul appareil.

M

'Maintenance'

Pièces requises pour la révision de l’appareil. Cet assortiment devrait être disponible dans une mallette. Cet assortiment doit être disponible pendant la révision. Il contient toutes les pièces spécifiques à l’appareil pour effecteur la maintenance en fonction de la Maintenance check list. Cette quantité est suffisante pour la révision d’un seul appareil.

L

'Local stock'

Pièces encombrantes, extrêmement onéreuses qui devraient être stockées dans le magasin central de votre pays à la place de l'assortiment R. La réserve de pièces stratégiques ne dépend pas du nombre d’appareils installés. Si le contrat de maintenance fait référence à ces pièces elles doivent être remplacées immédiatement.


Chapter 5 / 12 03-2007




Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Bestellung von Sortimenten Bestellung AGFA intern: Code AH602A im EVS öffnen, Sortimentsnummer für das gewünschte Sortiment R, I, M oder L eingeben und Einzelteile bestellen. Bestellung durch AGFA Partner: Das gewünschte Sortiment bei der zuständigen AGFA Vertretung mit Angabe der betreffenden Sortimentsnummer R, I, M oder L bestellen.

Ordering of Spare Part Kits AGFA internal orders: Open Code AH602A in the EVS, enter the kit number for the required assortment R, I, M, or L and order individual parts. Orders of AGFA partners: Order the required assortment via the responsible AGFA Agency listing the respective kit number of assortment R, I, M, or L.

Commande d'assortiments Commande interne à AGFA : ouvrir le code AH602A dans EVS, écrire le numéro de l'assortiment souhaité comme R, I, M ou L et passer commande des pièces. Commande par les partenaires d'AGFA : passer commande de l'assortiment souhaité auprès du dépositaire AGFA en charge en indiquant le numéro de l'assortiment comme R, I, M ou L.





Chapter 5 / 13 03-2007

Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Typenverzeichnis / Type List / List de Type CR User Station CR User Station

BASIC VERSION GE VERSION

5157/0100 5157/0200


Chapter 5 / 14 03-2007




Spare Parts List

DD+DIS180.05M

Optionen / Options / Options - INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK -

Nur über Vertrieb bestellbar / Can only be ordered through Sales / Passer commande uniquement par le service des ventes





Chapter 5 / 15 03-2007

14.03.2007 DD+DIS180.05M Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare Copyright © Alle Rechte vorbehalten / All rights reserved / Tous droits réservés Herausgegeben von / Published by / Edité par

Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare Tegernseer Landstraße 161 D - 81539 München Technische Änderungen vorbehalten Technical modifications reserved Sous réserve des modifications techniques

AGFA und der Agfa-Rhombus sind eingetragene Warenzeichen von Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trade marks of Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare AGFA et le logo Agfa sont des marques déposées de Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare


Chapter 8

HEALTHCARE


Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document contains an overview of all the technical changes and their chronological introduction as a production standard. This includes hardware and software modifications.

►

►


Release Date

2.0

12-2007

•

Initial Release


Title

n.a.

n.a.


12-2007 printed in Germany

Document Node ID: 12555604 eq_08_modifications_e_template_v02



DD+DIS219.06E




(2)






DD+DIS219.06E


TABLE OF CONTENT The following modifications of CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) are listed in chronological order, the latest modification on top of the list.

timeline

Modification

Referenced Documents

2007 August 1. Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump

Enclosure: DD+DIS151.07E, SB No. 02: DD+DIS276.07E

June 2. Introduction of Oberon 3 Board

Enclosure: DD+DIS034.07E

April 3. Modification of Brush Stripe complete

n.a.

January 4. Modification of Side Panel left

n.a.

2006 Dec. 5. Modification of cPCI-Rack October 6. Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board

n.a. n.a.

SB – Service Bulletin





DD+DIS219.06E

1


Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump Reason

A modified vacuum pump has been introduced for the use of the digitizer on sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above sea level.

Product(s)/ Serial Number(s)

The High Altitude Vacuum Pump is not part of series production and only available as upgrade kit for new installations or already installed digitizers as well as spare part for the replacement of modified vacuum pumps, which are defective.

Part Number(s)

•

Upgrade Kit “High Altitude Vacuum Pump for CR 25.0/CR 35-X” ABC Code: EZKDB

•

Spare part “High Altitude Vacuum Pump” CM+9 5158 6130 0

•

Enclosure - Replacement Instructions: High Altitude Vacuum Pump for Use on Sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above Sea Level, DD+DIS151.07E

•

Service Bulletin No. 02, DD+DIS276.07E

Referenced Document(s)





DD+DIS219.06E

2


Introduction of Oberon 3 Board Reason

In respect to the previous Oberon Board, the Oberon 3 Board is RoHS compliant (Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment).No functional changes have been made. Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher is required when using the Oberon 3 board. The required Digitizer Software is in scope of the spare part. This spare part can be used in RoHS compliant and non-RoHS compliant Digitizers. Oberon 3 Board requires Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher.


CR 35-X Type 5158: SN 2061, 2129, 2131, 2132, 2133, 2134, 2136, 2138, 2142, 2143, 2145, 2149, 2152, SN ≥ 2155, CW 25/2007 CR 25.0 Type 5156/105: SN 6211, 6220, 6224, 6225, 6228, 6229, 6231, 6232, 6233, 6236, 6237, 6238, 6239, 6240, 6241, 6242, 6243, 6244, SN ≥ 6246, CW 25/2007

Part Number(s)

•

Spare part “Oberon 3 Board”, CM+9 5146 1501 0


•

Enclosure - Installation Instructions of the Oberon 3 Board, DD+DIS034.07E





DD+DIS219.06E

3


Modification of Brush Stripe complete Reason

The spare part “Brush stripe complete” has been modified to prevent from stray light. which could probably influence sensors by flash light from the erasure unit.


CR 35-X Type 5158/100: SN 1744, 1861, 1866 SN ≥ 1868, , CW 17/2007 CR 25.0 Type 5156/105: SN ≥ 6201, CW 17/2007

4

Part Number(s)

•


n.a.

Spare part “Brush stripe complete” CM+9 5158 2425 1

Modification of Side Panel left Reason

The side panel left has been modified to ensure more free space between photomultiplier and side panel left. This improvement has been introduced to avoid contact between photomultiplier and side panel left.


CR 35-X Type 5158/100: SN ≥ 1001 CR 25.0 Type 5156/105: SN ≥ 6001

Part Number(s)

•


n.a.

Spare part “Side wall, lhs”, CM+9 5155 1270 4





DD+DIS219.06E

5


Modification of cPCI-Rack Reason

The power supply unit has been modified to enable the use of hard disks with higher voltage input. The modified power supply unit is RoHS compliant.


CR 35-X Type 5158/100: SN ≥ 1385, CW 52/2006 CR 25.0 Type 5156/105: SN ≥ 6001, CW 52/2006

6

Part Number(s)

• •


n.a.

Spare part “cPCI-Rack complete, CM+9 5156 1400 1 Spare part “cPCI-Rack assembled”, CM+9 5156 1405 4

Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board Reason

The fixation of the 5-fold stepper motor board has been changed by introducing new clips to prevent bending of the board.


CR 35-X Type 5158/100:

Part Number(s)

The new fixation and the board are included when ordering: spare part “Cassette unit”: CM+9 5156 5000 1


n.a.

SN ≥ 1048, CW 41/2006





HEALTHCARE

Chapter 9

Maintenance

Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)


CR 35-X

CR 25.0

Type 5158 / 100

Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS403.06E. CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


Document Node ID: 12401817 eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v02


DD+DIS403.06E

Maintenance



(2)






DD+DIS403.06E

►

Maintenance

Purpose of this document This document describes all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin






DD+DIS403.06E

Maintenance

LIST OF CONTENTS

1

2

3

4

GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ...........................................................................5 1.1

Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................5

1.2

Required Time...........................................................................................................................6

1.3

Required Tools..........................................................................................................................6

1.4

Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................6

1.5

Required Spare Parts ...............................................................................................................6

MAINTENANCE STEP BY STEP .............................................................................................7 2.1

Diagnostics................................................................................................................................7

2.1.1

Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................7

2.1.2

Infocounter Analysis..................................................................................................................7

2.1.3

How to Evaluate the Infocounter...............................................................................................8

2.1.4

Clear Infocounter ......................................................................................................................9

2.1.5

Visual Check .............................................................................................................................9

2.2

Safety Switches ......................................................................................................................10

2.3

Inside.......................................................................................................................................10

2.4

Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................11

2.5

cPCI Rack ...............................................................................................................................12

2.6

Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................12

2.7

Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................13

2.8

Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................14

2.9

Cassettes ................................................................................................................................16

2.10

Image Plates ...........................................................................................................................17

CHECKING THE IMAGE QUALITY........................................................................................17 3.1

Test Cycles .............................................................................................................................17

3.2

Exposure of a Flatfield ............................................................................................................17

3.3

Evaluation of a Flatfield...........................................................................................................20

COMPLETION OF MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................21





DD+DIS403.06E

1

Maintenance

General Maintenance Information NOTE: These maintenance instructions must be considered confidential. To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed below (minimum maintenance points) must be carried out. •

The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable order to make the work routines as efficient as possible. The sequence of the maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is identical with these maintenance instructions.

•

If there is a detailed description for a certain maintenance point in the service documentation, this will be noted in the column "details".

•

During the maintenance procedure always consider the safety instructions, see service documentation chapter 1 / 1.

•

Please check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as additional maintenance points!

NOTE: Only for Systems with DRA Contract: In systems with DRA Contract the infocounters are checked and evaluated in regular intervals by the GSC. If there is an indication of an upcoming defect, this is noted in the DRA Report and sent to the respective NSO with instructions for measures possibly required on the machine. Therefore we recommend to contact your NSO about this subject before maintenance, in order to perform these recommended measures in addition to the "must" maintenance points.

1.1

Maintenance Frequency The maintenance has to be carried out: • every 12.000 cycles or •

once a year DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS403.06E

1.2

Maintenance

Required Time

approximately 2 h

1.3

1.4

Required Tools Order number

Description

CM+9 5155 1015 2

Cu Filter (for exposure of test images)

CM+9 5145 3055 0

CD ROM with test images

Commercially available

service PC

Commercially available

flashlight

Required Cleaning Material In addition to the standard equipment the following cleaning substances are required:

1.5

Order number

Description

CM+9 9999 0895 0

vacuum cleaner

CM+9 9999 0896 0

dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x)

ABC-Code: EFOJH

ADC cleaner

commercially available

dust brush


lint-free cloth


soft dust brush

Required Spare Parts The following assortment represents a complete copy of the Maintenance-assortment (CM+0 5156 0100 733) according to the R I M L -assortment categorization in the spare parts list: Order number

Description

CM+9 0450 6553 0

10 x erasure lamp, 100 W, 12 V

CM+9 5145 9100 0

1 x roller (for cassette unit)





DD+DIS403.06E

Maintenance

2

Maintenance Step by Step

2.1

Diagnostics

2.1.1

Questioning of the Customer •

2.1.2

Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.

Infocounter Analysis •

Service PC, required to analyze the infocounter

(1)

Insert an empty floppy in the floppy drive of the cPCI rack. See figure 1.

(2)

In the service menu select <3 Save on floppy> < 1 Infocounter>

(3)

When copying is finished remove the floppy from the floppy drive and insert it in the Service PC.

MG3000

Infocounter

5155_reg09_002.cdr

figure 1 (4)

Unzip the file "5156_xxxx_icn.zip" (xxxx stands for the serial number).

(5)

Start an editor (e.g. notepad or wordpad).

(6)

Open the file "\D_\infocounter\0\infocounter.txt".

(7)

Evaluate the infocounter file.





DD+DIS403.06E

2.1.3

Maintenance

How to Evaluate the Infocounter Evaluation of infocounters.txt What to check in the infocounter

Comment

1.1 Device Info: Serial number and Installation date

Compare device serial number to chapter 8 “Manufacturing Standard Modifications” and chapter 10 “Service Bulletins” to determine whether the device is modified or requires a modification.

1.4 Software Info

It is recommended to have the latest software installed. Before you upgrade to a new software, make sure that your hardware is up to date.

2.2 Throughput

For throughput most important are the cycles per day. They usually count between 30 and 100.

3.3 Hardware Modification History

By comparing the status of the device with the available “Field Modifications”, chapter 7, the exact hardware status can be determined.

3.4 Software modification history

By checking the software modification history it can be determined, whether a recent software upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite often in the error list.

4.6 Laser power

Check that laser power is constant: no more than 1 mW difference in between two entries. If the value is higher, run system check.

4.7 Polygon Jitter Monitoring

If amplitude exceeded 300 milli-pixel, check accurately the image quality on the processing station. The entries are only indications and can only be interpreted as one symptom which is conducted to the optic module.





DD+DIS403.06E

Maintenance

Evaluation of infocounters.txt What to check in the infocounter

Comment

5.3 Retries

Many retries (> 1%) have to be investigated: They usually lead to less throughput of the device. Compare it with frequent error codes.

5.7 Error History

Check the errors occurred since last maintenance, how often they appeared as well as the CBF (cycles between failures) of these errors. This gives an overview of the current status of the machine. Compare frequently occurring errors to the error hit list, chapter 3.3, and take actions.

5.8 Error List Relatives and 5.9 Error List Total

2.1.4

Clear Infocounter (1)

2.1.5

Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the technical documentation, chapter 3.3, “Troubleshooting”.

Clear the infocounter to refresh relative counters.

Visual Check •

flashlight

(1)

Check overall condition of the machine – outside and inside – for obvious changes or damage.





DD+DIS403.06E

2.2

Maintenance

Safety Switches (1)

Check both interlock switches (A) and (B), figure 2. A

Note. The machine starts up only, if both interlocks are pressed.

B

Note: The power supply is interrupted, when the front door (interlock A) is opened.

5155_reg09_003.cdr

figure 2

2.3

Inside •

vacuum cleaner

•

lint free cloth

(1)

Vacuum the inside of the digitizer and wipe it.





DD+DIS403.06E

2.4

Opener Mechanism

Maintenance

Cassette Unit •

screw driver

•

dust brush

•

roller (CM+9 5145 9100 0)

•

toothed belt (CM+9 5145 5195 1)

(1)

Remove panel on right hand side of the digitizer.

(2)

Clean the opener mechanism with a soft dust brush.

5155_reg09_004.cdr

figure 3 (1)

Check roller (A) for visible wear and replace if necessary (see figure 4).

(2)

To replace the roller, remove the retaining ring (B) and pull the roller off its shaft.

(3) NOTE: In case of recorded cassette feeding problems replace the roller anyway and in any case replace it once a year.

B A 5155_reg09_005.cdr

figure 4 Belt

(1)

Exchange the transport belt once a year.





DD+DIS403.06E

2.5

Maintenance

cPCI Rack •

vacuum cleaner

cPCI Fan

(1)

Check the fan function of the cPCI rack fan by hand. There is no air filter to be replaced.

General

(2)

Remove visible dust and dirt deposits using a vacuum cleaner.

2.6

Scan Rollers

Scan Unit •

soft cloth

•

ADC cleaner (if not available, use water)

•

Allen key 3 mm

(1)

Remove the transport unit. (see chapter 3.5).

(2)

Clean all scan rollers (use a soft cloth and ADC cleaner).

IMPORTANT: The scan rollers have to be cleaned in place and must not be removed. To move the scan rollers just turn the drive of the slow scan motor manually (C), see figure 5.

Discharge Brush

(1)

Check the discharge brush (A) for visible wear and heavy dirt. Clean them by hand or replace (B), if necessary.

5155_reg09_006.cdr

figure 5





DD+DIS403.06E

2.7

Maintenance

Transport Unit

Filter

•

soft cloth

•


•

suction cups (CM+9 5145 6550 2)

(2)

Pull the hoses off the filter.

(3)

Unscrew the filter (A).

(4)

Shake the micro-filter (B) and blow it clean.

(5)

Check the O-ring for cracks and, if necessary, remove the complete filter with its housing (CM+9 0362 6094 0).

B A

5155_reg09_012.cdr

figure 6 Suction Cups

(1)

Check the suction cups position.

(2)

Clean the suction cups (C) with ADC cleaner.

(3)

A

In case of vacuum problems, check the suction cups by bending up the edges (check for tears) and replace if necessary.

5155_reg09_007.cdr

figure 7





DD+DIS403.06E

2.8

Lamps

Maintenance

Erasure Unit •

soft cloth

•


•

10 x 100 W lamps (CM+9 0450 6553 0)

(1)

Open the front door.

(2)

Pull the erasure unit out and remove it.

(3)

Remove pane (A).

(4)

Pull all lamps carefully out of their sockets (B).

(5)

Check all parts of the erasure unit for damage.

B

A

5155_reg09_008.cdr

figure 8 (6)

Dust the following parts of the erasure unit

•

reflector

•

input and output opening of the air stream (protection grid)

•

KG2 filter (A).

•

front pane (B) (see figure 9).

IMPORTANT: In case of persistent dirt, use ADC cleaner for cleaning all surfaces except the inner side of the large glass plate. This side must not be cleaned with anything wet since a gelatin layer is attached to it.





DD+DIS403.06E

Maintenance

(7)

Check the KG2 filter (A) for damage and replace if necessary.

(8)

Insert the new lamps carefully.

A

B 5155_reg09_009.cdr

figure 9

NOTE: Do not touch the glass bulbs with your bare fingers. Use a soft cloth to insert the lamps.

Fan

(9)

Check fan of erasure unit for dust and clean if necessary.

(10) Re-insert the erasure unit.





DD+DIS403.06E

2.9

Cassettes •

Visual Check

Maintenance

aluminum label (CM+9 8300 1131 0)

(1)

Check the most frequently used cassettes and image plates for damage. If damage is noticed, check further cassettes.

(2)

Check the following items of the cassette: - Outside condition - Hinges - Locking - Opening leaf springs - Aluminum label

(3)

ALU LABEL

5156_reg09_010.cdr

figure 10

Attach missing aluminum label.

NOTE: The digitizer needs the aluminum label to recognize ADC cassettes.





DD+DIS403.06E

2.10 Visual Check

3

Maintenance

Image Plates (1)

Check if there are scratches on the surface.

(2)

Check if edges are loose as an indication for mechanical problems at IP transport.

Checking the Image Quality NOTE: Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS Processing Station / ADC QS Server Station for artifacts or other image quality problems.

3.1

Test Cycles NOTE: Repeat the following procedure for all formats on site! (1)

3.2

Carry out four test cycles with each format of the cassettes.

Exposure of a Flatfield •

Flatfield

(1)

Print the flatfield sample provided by the digitizer: • Start the service program. • Select from the service menu <7 Checks> <2 Send image> <2 Flatfield Calibration pattern> <3 Flatfield Banding pattern> Print the flatfields "Calibration" and "Banding" via the processing station (Window Setting of 0.6, without changing the Level Setting).





DD+DIS403.06E

(2)

Maintenance

Expose a new image plate:

Rotating

• Place the cassette in length direction Anode to the X-ray tube (see figure 11). • Set the following exposure parameters: − dose 10 µGy (result of setting: 12 mAs, 75 kVp, 1.3 m distance) − 1.5 mm Cu filter with small focus figure 11 • Turn cassette by 180°. • Expose plate a second time by using the same parameters.

X-ray tube

5156_reg09_011.cdr

NOTE: Best use a dosimeter to measure the dose! Notice, that all exposure parameters are approximate values. (3)

Identify the cassette on the ID Station (figure 12): • In the field, type a name and a cassette format, e.g. Flatfield 18 x 24. • In the field, type the serial number of the digitizer, e.g. SN1356. • In the field, type the current date, e.g. 02012001 (use date format DDMMYYYY for day/month/year). • In the list, click . • In the list, click . • In the list, click . • Confirm the Exposure class <200>.

NOTE: Make sure that the outlined areas are filled in as shown in the example.





DD+DIS403.06E

(4)

Maintenance

Insert the cassette into the digitizer and print the image on a printer with a Window Setting of 0.6 without changing the Level Setting.

figure 12





DD+DIS403.06E

3.3

Maintenance

Evaluation of a Flatfield (1)

Inspect the developed image for homogeneity: Compare the prints of the flatfield sample with your exposed flatfield at a light box. • If there are no lines visible or the effects are less than on the example, the image quality is all right. • If there are unacceptable effects, compare with the following sketches.

Calibration lines Blurred dark lines in slow scan direction on the flatfield (see figure 13). • Expose another flatfield and compare it again with the sample. If there are still unacceptable effects, you have to redo shading calibration as described in chapter 3.6. Expose another flatfield and compare it again with the sample.

figure 13

NOTE: If there are still unacceptable effects, please contact the Support Center.

Banding Fine sharp white or gray lines in fast scan direction on the flatfield (see figure 14). • Check diagnostic images.

figure 14





DD+DIS403.06E

Maintenance


Dust Fine sharp lines in slow scan direction on the flatfield (see figure 15). • Check if scanner is dusty. If yes, use the scan brush to remove it. Expose another flat field and compare it again with the sample. figure 15


4

Completion of Maintenance (1)

Confirm the maintenance by signing the checklist.

(2)

Make a backup of the system on floppy.

(3)

Inform the customer about what was done during the maintenance and which repairs need to be done in next future.








Chapter 9

HEALTHCARE

Maintenance

Imaging Services

Maintenance Checklist


CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document contains the Maintenance Checklist.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin




Document Node ID: 12403495 eq_09_maintenance-checklist_e_template_v02


Maintenance Maintenance Checklist

DD+DIS403.06E



(2)







DD+DIS403.06E

1

Maintenance Checklist

Work Instruction for order no.

SN

Film cycles

The maintenance has to be carried out: Once a year or every 12.000 cycles.

NOTE: Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions DD+403.06E Maintenance Step by Step

Done

•

Ask customer about problems

•

Read out the info counters, analyse them and clear them afterwards

•

Check visually the overall condition

Safety Switches

•

Check function of both safety switches

Inside

•

Vacuum the inside and wipe it

Cassette Unit

•

Clean opener mechanism

•

Check roller for visible wear and exchange if necessary

•

Exchange belt once a year

•

Check function of the cPCI rack fan manually

•

Remove dust and dirt

•

Clean scan-rollers with ADC Cleaner (do not remove!)

•

Check discharge brush and clean or replace it if necessary

•

Clean micro filter

•

Check suction cups position, clean them with ADC Cleaner and exchange suction cups if necessary

Diagnostics

cPCI Rack Scan Unit

Transport Units






DD+DIS403.06E

Maintenance Step by Step Erasure Unit

Cassettes

Image Plates

Done

•

Remove dust from reflector, input and output opening of air stream, KG2 filter, outer front panel

•

Check the KG2 filter

•

Exchange lamps every maintenance

•

Clean fan, if necessary

•

Check the following items of the cassette: outside condition, hinges, locking, opening leaf springs, aluminum label

•

Attach missing aluminum labels

•

Check if there are scratches on the surface

•

Check if edges are loose

Checking the Image Quality General

Done

•

Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS / ADC QS

•

Carry out test cycles, four with each format

•

Print flatfield sample provided by the digitizer

•

Expose a flatfield

•

Evaluate the flatfield and carry out respective actions

Completion of the maintenance General

Done

•

Confirm the maintenance

•

Make a backup of the system on floppy

•

Inform the customer about maintenance and which repairs are necessary






DD+DIS403.06E

Remarks:

.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................

............................................................. Date / Signature Service Technician

......................................................... Customer





HEALTHCARE

Chapter 10

Service Bulletins

Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Please note

Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download. Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library: MEDNET GSO Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ CR 35-X Æ Service Bulletin


Edition 2, Revision 0 02-2008 printed in Germany


Document Node ID: 22696955 service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01


DD+DIS219.06E

Service Bulletins

intentionally left blank



CR 35-X Type 5158/100 Chapter 10 / 2 CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 as of SN ≥ 6000 Agfa Company Confidential

HEALTHCARE

Chapter 11


Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)


CR 35-X

CR 25.0

Type 5158 / 100

Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS402.06E. CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.


Document Node ID: 12403497 eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v02


DD+DIS402.06E


1

2

3



(2)






DD+DIS402.06E

►


1

2

3

Purpose of this document This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried out on site prior to the machine delivery. This chapter is divided into:

►

•

construction planning data

•

technical connection and performance data

•

safety instructions, listing of certificates


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin






DD+DIS402.06E


1

2

3

LIST OF CONTENTS

1

SCOPE OF DELIVERY ............................................................................................................5

2

REQUIRED TOOLS FOR INSTALLATION ..............................................................................5

3

SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................6

4

MACHINE DIMENSIONS AND TRANSPORT PATH ...............................................................7 4.1

Required free Space .................................................................................................................7

4.1.1

CR 35-X Standalone .................................................................................................................7

4.1.2

CR 35-X with CRUS..................................................................................................................8

4.1.3

Required free Space when Digitizer is set up in Patient Examination Room ...........................9

4.2

Machine Dimensions...............................................................................................................10

4.3

Transport Path ........................................................................................................................11

5

CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................12

6

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................13

7

8

6.1

External Fuse Protection.........................................................................................................13

6.2

Connection Cables..................................................................................................................13

6.3

Power Connection...................................................................................................................14

SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................15 7.1

Type Overview ........................................................................................................................15

7.2

Electrical Data .........................................................................................................................15

7.3

Packing Dimensions ...............................................................................................................15

7.3.1

Package ..................................................................................................................................15

7.3.2

Weights ...................................................................................................................................15

7.3.3

Transport Conditions...............................................................................................................16

INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST..............................................................................17 8.1

9

Checklist..................................................................................................................................18

FORM TO FILL IN THE NETWORK PARAMETERS .............................................................19





DD+DIS402.06E


1

2

3

NOTE: This document describes the Installation Planning of the CR 35-X Digitizer, Type 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) For the Installation Planning of other ADC devices, refer to the respective Installation Planning documents (see MedNet).

1

Scope of Delivery Pieces

2

Description

1

Digitizer

1


1

Installation Report

1

User Manual

1

Reference Manual

1

Certificates

2

Mains Cable (1 x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)

1

UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)

8

floppy disks (3 x Release floppy, 1 x Hard Disk Formatter floppy, 1 x Backup floppy, 1 x Language floppy, 2 x Portex floppy)

1

Cu filter

Required Tools for Installation Pieces

Description

Order No.

1

Cu filter

CM+9 5155 1015 2

1

CD-ROM with test images

CM+9 5145 3055 0





DD+DIS402.06E

3


1

2

3

System Overview

on ly

figure 1

The above example shows the Digitizer connected to a WIN NT based ADC Quality System (ADC QS).





DD+DIS402.06E


4

Machine Dimensions and Transport Path

4.1

Required free Space

4.1.1

CR 35-X Standalone

2

3

150 (59.05")

5(1.97") 5 (1.97")

1

45 (17.72")

120 (47.24")

200 (78.74")

75 (29.53")

Digitizer

5155_reg11_002.CDR

figure 2 Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and maintenance. Less space may result in longer repair times! All dimensions in cm (inch). Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and Ethernet connection.





DD+DIS402.06E

4.1.2


1

2

3

CR 35-X with CRUS

figure 3 Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and maintenance. Less space may result in longer repair times! All dimensions in cm (inch). Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and Ethernet connection.





DD+DIS402.06E

4.1.3


1

2

3

Required free Space when Digitizer is set up in Patient Examination Room IMPORTANT: When setting up the machine, the following must be kept in mind during the room planning: The CR 30-X complies with the EN 60601-1 standard for Information Technology. This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m around the patient.





DD+DIS402.06E

4.2


1

2

3

Machine Dimensions

figure 4 All dimensions in cm (inch).





DD+DIS402.06E

4.3


1

2

3

Transport Path It must be possible to transport the digitizer through all hallways and doors up to the installation site.

Minimum doorwidth 47 cm (18.50")

The machine dimensions are

134 cm x 45 cm x 75 cm (H x W x D) 52.76" x 17.72" x 29.53" (H x W x D)

Packed on a pallet

80 cm x 100 cm (31.5" x 39.37")

Minimum space to remove the digitizer off the pallet

200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138")

NOTE: Once the machine is unpacked, it can be moved to the installation site on four mounted rollers.





DD+DIS402.06E

5


1

2

3

Climatic and ambient Conditions NOTE: All specifications in this chapter apply on unpacked digitizer.

Temperature and Humidity Ambient temperature

20°C min. / 59°F min. 30°C max. / 86°F max. 20°C ideal / 68°F ideal

Rate of change of temperature

0.5°C per min. / 0.9°F per min.

Relative Humidity

15 % min. 75 % max. 40 - 50 % ideal

(at 25°C / 77°F ambient temperature) Light Tightness Tightness

SALMIN still met at 2500 lux ambient light

NOTE: The digitizer must not be operated in direct sunlight exposure. Throughput (scan mode fast) Throughput (Image plates per hour)

71 (for size 18 cm x 24 cm) 48 (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)

Cassette Return Time Time between entry of cassette and return of erased cassette (seconds)

< 51 s (for size 18 cm x 24 cm) < 75 s (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)





DD+DIS402.06E


1

2

3

Floor Conditions Horizontal Alignment

Digitizer works without leveling, horizontal alignment is not required. Nevertheless, the digitizer should be run preferably in a horizontal position. Take care that the digitizer can not tilt at the installation site.

Magnetic Fields Maximal permissible magnetic field in the room

according to EN 61000-4-8: Level 5

Emissions Noise level

during scanning max. 65 dB (A) stand-by mode / idle max. 45 dB (A)

6

Electrical Connections

6.1

External Fuse Protection

6.2

Fuse

Rated voltage (single phase)

maximal line fuse 16 A

240 V, + 10 %


230 V, + 10 %


120 V, + 10 %

(e.g. USA)


100 V, + 10 %

(e.g. Japan)

Connection Cables Two mains cables are included as standard delivery: •

USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P

•

Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V/16 A

One network cable is included as standard delivery •

UTP network cable, 5 m long, (2 x RJ45 connection)





DD+DIS402.06E

6.3


1

2

3

Power Connection Single phase connection, operable on 50 Hz and 60 Hz. IMPORTANT: The digitizer has a voltage selector at its rear side. Voltage adaptation has to be checked prior to first operation. If the voltage adaptation is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch (1, figure 5) to correct position.

1 Voltage selector Voltage can be adapted to 100 / 120 / 230 - 240 V. The default setting is 230 - 240 V 2 Mains connection Put in the correct mains cable (delivered in the enclosure box)

1

2

_0 g11 5_re 515

dr 04.c

figure 5

NOTE: If the CR 35-X shall operate at 240 V, 60 Hz, use a phase to phase centre tap wall outlet. Otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.





DD+DIS402.06E


7

Specifications

7.1

Type Overview

7.2

Digitizer /

Type

CR 35-X

5158 / 100

CR 25.0

5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

1

2

3

Electrical Data Rated Voltage [~V]

100 V

15 A

120 V

12 A

230 - 240 V

7A

Frequency [Hz]

50 / 60

Power consumption [W]

Standby approx. 400 W Maximum approx. 1400 W

Leakage current

7.3

Packing Dimensions

7.3.1

Package

≤ 3,5 mA

Packed on a pallet the size is:

7.3.2

Height

160 cm (63")

Width

80 cm (31.5")

Depth

100 cm (39.4")

Weights Digitizer without package

approx. 215 kg

Digitizer with package

approx. 275 kg

NOTE: Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the digitizer.





DD+DIS402.06E

7.3.3


1

2

3

Transport Conditions Temperature

-25 °C / -13 °F for 72 hrs. +55 °C / 131 °F for 96 hrs.

Relative Humidity

5 % to 95 %





DD+DIS402.06E

8


1

2

3

Installation Planning Checklist In order to avoid any unnecessary delays during the installation and the machine startup, the following points of the checklist below should be carried out prior to the installation. Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of this checklist. Remarks on the individual items may be made on the back of the list. We ask you to give this checklist to your local Agfa representative. Customer:

........................................................................................ .................................

Department:

........................................................................................ .................................

System components:

........................................................................................ ................................. ........................................................................................ ................................. ........................................................................................ ................................. ........................................................................................ ................................. ........................................................................................ .................................

Desired installation date:

.......................... Signed: ............................................. .......................... Signature .......

Remarks:





DD+DIS402.06E

8.1


1

2

3

Checklist Subject

OK

NOK

Required external connections

Fixed connection via an all-pole main switch or connection via plug and socket approx. 30 cm from the floor. Cables USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A

Mains connection

Appointment with the house electrician or authorized electrician for the mains connection has been made?

Network connection Ethernet connection (Twisted pair) prepared?

Direct Remote Access

Remote Access must be guaranteed!

Transport path

Transport to the installation site, unpacking and taking the machine off the pallet must be done by the carrier.

Transport path: Minimum doorwidth 47 cm (18.50") Way: ....................................................... ................................................... Free space for taking the machine off the pallet defined? 200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138") Place: ....................................................... ..................................................





DD+DIS402.06E

9


1

2

3

Form to fill in the Network Parameters Digitizer

Example

hostname

ADCS1

ip_addr.

192.9.200.199

1st Digitizer

2nd Digitizer

Remarks

1st Server Station

2nd Server Station

Remarks

Subnet_mask default router AE_title

ADCS1

Station Name *

ADCS1

ADC QS

Example

Server Station hostname

ADC_QS

ip_addr.

192.9.200.202

subnet_mask default router AE_title

ADC_QS

AE_title IDViewer Station Name *

ADC_QS

ID - Viewer

Example

hostname

ID207

ip_addr.

192.9.200.207

1st ID-Viewer 2nd ID-Viewer

Remarks


ID207

Station Name *

ID207

ADC QS Server to connect to

192.9.200.202 or ADC_QS

= main components DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.




DD+DIS402.06E


ADC QS Client Station

Example

hostname

QC206

ip_addr.

192.9.200.206

1st Client Station

2nd Client Station

Remarks

1st HCP

2nd HCP

Remarks

1

2

3

Subnet_mask default router AE_title ID-Viewer ADC QS Server to 192.9.200.202 connect to or ADC_QS

Hard Copy Printer

Example

hostname

MG1

ip_addr.

192.9.200.201


ADC_LR1

Station Name *

ADC_LR1

Remarks

RIS-System hostname ip_addr. Subnet_mask default router AE_title Station Name * *) Friendly name

(Station name) appears in the USER interface

Site

filled in by

Date





DD+DIS402.06E


1

2

3

Intentionally left blank!








HEALTHCARE

Chapter 12

Glossary

Imaging Services


CR 35-X Type 5158 /100

CR 25.0 Type 5156 /105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)

►

Purpose of this document This document contains explanations of product specific terms and abbreviations used in the service documentation.

►


Release Date

Changes

2.0

12-2006


►



Title

Service Bulletin




Document Node ID: 12413377 eq_12_glossary_e_template_v02


DD+DIS219.06E

Glossary



(2)






DD+DIS219.06E

1

Glossary

Glossary Term

Shord Description

µGy

Micro Gray – x-ray dose 1Gy= 0.87 x 10 –2 J/kg

A / D Converter

Analog Digital Converter; the part that translates an analog signal into a digital signal, which can be handled by computers.

ADC

Agfa Diagnostic Center

AE – title

Application Entity

AOS

Adonis Operating System Operating system for Agfa CPU's (Gemini, Goliath, David)

APIP

Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol

AUI

Attachment Unit Interface (External „Box“ to connect to a network)

AS

Archive Station

BOL

Begin Of Line; Sensor for exact positioning the scan surface along the x-axis. A PIN diode is hit by the laser beam before it reaches the image plate. The Pin diode creates a digital signal, called begin of line signal. The distance (time) between this signal and the IP must be adjusted.

BOS

Begin Of Scan;

Browser

Software that provides an interface to the World Wide Web

BSP

Boot Support Package: boot program for Agfa CPU's

Calibration

Procedure on ADC to make a homogeneous exposure look like one on film. Algorithm to counterbalance irregularities in the scanner of ADC.

CAS

Clinical Application Specialist

CCM

Configuration and Customization Manager (Tool to edit the configuration file adc.cpf)

Collimation

Determination of the region in the image where the interesting data is at. On that region the image processing is applied..

Controller

Is connected ahead the laser recorder. The controller is responsible for the image reception from the diagnostic equipment, the image processing, layout of the images on the film, and image transmission to the machine.

cPCI

compact Peripheral Component Interconnect – bus system used in CR85-X





DD+DIS219.06E

Glossary

CPF – file

Customization Parameter File; file that contains settings for all parameters that can be modified to configure an ADC System according to local needs.

CPU

Central Processing Unit.

CR

Computed Radiography

CR Quality System

Agfa’s CR Processing Station software

CU-Filter

Copper Filter, used for control of image quality

DAC

Digital Analog Converter

Decomposition

The original image is being split up in a set of bandpassfiltered images

Diagnostic Logger

Tool on ADC to keep a lot of reduced images with the corresponding image data on the HD.

DICOM

Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine;

Dose, x-ray dose

= kV x mA x sec see also µGy = Micro Gray

Dosimeter

Device to measure x-ray dose

DR

Direct Radiography

DRA

Direct Remote Access (external product name: AGFATEC LINK)

Dynamic Range

Exposure range in which ADC can get usable image data.

Ethernet

A network standard for the hardware and data link levels.

FSE

Field Service Engineer

FTP

File Transfer Protocol. The Internet service that transfers files from one computer to another. (Program used for transmission of files in the Internet)

Grid

to reduce scattered radiation to increase sharpness

GSC

Global Support Center

GUI

Graphical User Interface

HT power supply

High Tension power supply

HCP

Hard Copy Printer

HDD

Hard Disk Drive

Heel Effect

inhomogeneous exposure

HiRes

High Resolution: pixel size = 100 micrometer





DD+DIS219.06E

Glossary

HIS

Hospital Information System

Histogram

graphical display of the distribution of gray levels

HUB (Ethernet)

box to interconnect network hosts with Twisted Pair cable. Also called concentrator.

HUB (in AGFA devices)

Switchbox (Hard- or Software) which switches or multiplexes different channels, e.g. AMDI and Service Channel.

I/O BUS

Input / Output BUS. System consisting of a defined cable, cable connection, and signal for the parallel transmission of control data. The machine uses a bus system of 8 V level and 26 parallel lines.

ID Station

IDENTIFICATION Station

IMOS

IMAGE MONITOR SOFTWARE -Æ succession for SMA

Internet

The global computer network, composed of thousands of Wide Area Networks (WANs) and Local Area Networks (LANs), that uses TCP/IP to provide world-wide communication to homes, schools, businesses, and governments. The World Wide Web runs on the Internet.

IP

for ADC: Image Plate (phosphor plate)

IP

Image Processing

IP

(Internet Protocol) Internet software that divides data into packets for transmission over the Internet. Computers must run IP to communicate across the Internet. See also TCP.

IP-Address

(Internet Protocol Address) The standard method which identifies an internet connected computer.

Java

A general-purpose programming language created by Sun Microsystems. Java can be used to create Java applets. A Java program is downloaded from the Web server and interpreted by a program running on the machine containing the Web browser.

Java applet

A short program written in Java that is attached to a World Wide Web page and executed by the browser machine.

JavaScript

A cross-platform, World Wide Web scripting language developed by Netscape Communications. JavaScript code is inserted directly into the HTML page.

LAN

Local Area Network. Network technology, designed to connect computers over short distances. It is possible to connect the LAN with the Internet or to make a configuration into an intranet.

Laser

Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation:

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display





DD+DIS219.06E

Glossary

LED

Light Emitting Diode; Semi conductor emitting light

Leeds Phantom

Image Plate to check the technical image quality of the ADC. The Leeds Phantom was developed for Agfa by the University of Leeds.

Low Pass Filtering

Butterworth filter in SAB – board to eliminate frequencies > 250 kHz.

LUT

Look Up Table

MD – Plate

AGFA MD Æ Medium Definition Image Plate

MFA

Machine Factor A Machine specific value indicating the photo multiplier sensitivity MFA is the log of the PM high voltage which results in a scan average level SAL1800 at a given dose of 1mR (~20 µGy) and a speed class 200

MFB

Machine Factor B

MIMOSA

Medical IMage Operating System Agfa; Agfa's workstation operating software

MODEM

MODULATOR DEMODULATOR – device to connect via telephone line to another computer.

Monitor – level

lowest software level on CPU (like BIOS on DOS systems) stored on EEPROM milli Röntgen, measure for x-ray dose

mR

1 mR corres. 8.7 µGy MS-Board

Multy Supply Board; is part of the Power Unit, detects supply voltage, controls the mechanical periphery of the digitizer and protects the stepper motor boards.

MUSICA

MUltiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification; Agfa's image processing software

Network location

In a URL, the unique name that identifies an Internet server. A network location has two or more parts, separated by periods, as in my.network.location. Also called host name and Internet address.

Node

Nodes in the I/O bus system = printed circuit board in the I/O bus.

Nullmodem

RS 232 (RS242) cable with crossed Transmit / Receive Line

NVE

Name value file editor; editor system for parameter





DD+DIS219.06E

Glossary

NX

NX is Agfa’s new standalone CR Processing Station for: image acquisition, identification, image processing and image transmission of digitized images received from a digitizer It prepares these images for diagnostic use and sends them to a printer, an archive or a diagnostic station

OBERON board

CPU in Agfa digitizers, successor of ARIEL board

OLUT

Output Look-Up Table

OS

Operating System

Password

A text string that allows a user access to an Internet service, if the service requires it.

Photomultiplier Tube Photo Multiplier Tube: opto – electronical sensitive device to convert light (laser emission) in current and with a I / V – (PMT) Converter into voltage Pixel

Scanning point on the film or plate. A maximum of 2048 per line may be read by the Photomultiplier.

Preview Monitor

displays the image and the name of the patient. This monitor enables to roughly check whether the exposure was successful.

PRID

PREVIEW and ID Station, installed on one PC, used on older CR systems, current CR QS systems use the ID viewer software

PS

Processing Station

Pyramidal Image

Image file format of images on VIPS

Quantisation

compression of image files

RAM

Random Access Memory volatile main memory of computers

RAM – DISK

virtual harddisk simulated in the CPU main memory Gemini RAM-Disk contains all the machine dependent parameters, e.g. stepper motor steps, info counters

REM Tool

Debugging tool for AOS logfiles

Reset

Machine reset into a defined machine status. Various checking routines are carried out during a reset.

RIS

Radiology Information System

ROI

Region Of Interest

ROM

Read Only Memory

RS232 interface

Serial interface which converts computer internal parallel information into serial bits, and vice versa.





DD+DIS219.06E

Glossary

Scan Average Level

SAL

Digitized photo multiplier signal of an average of several hundred scanned lines Range SAL0 – SAL4095 (12bit) SCP

SOFTCOPY Tool

SCSI

Small Computer Systems Interface – interface to connect peripherals to computers (e.g. HDD, CD-ROM)

Server

A computer that shares its resources, such as printers and files, with other computers on the network.

Service interface

RS232 standard interface for the connection of the Service PC.

Shading Calibration

position dependent sensitivity calibration; calibration of each pixel in a line

Shell

User Interface of the VME – AOS

Slowscan direction

Transport Direction of Image Plate through the scan unit. The stepper motor speed is calculated such that the distance between two scan lines equals the distance between two pixels in a line.

Speed Class (SC)

Dose=1mR + SC100 => D=1 above fog + base A film-screen-system with speed class 100 which is exposed with a dose of 1mR results in a density 1 above fog+base.

Square Root Compression

Signal ∼

N.

Method to quantisize Signal in 12 similar block sizes

Standard Res

Standard Resolution: pixel size = 150 micrometer

Subnet number

A part of the internet address which designates a subnet

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol. Internet networking software that controls the transmission of packets of data over the Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks for lost packets, puts the data from multiple packets into the correct order, and requests that missing or damaged packets be resent. Computers must run TCP to communicate with World Wide Web servers.

TCP/IP

Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. Common Protocol for Networks. Used in the Internet

Text Field

Part of the film displaying patient, hospital and image processing information





DD+DIS219.06E

Glossary

UI

User Interface; part of a computer program that handles interaction with the user.

UPS

Uninterruptible Power Supply

URL

Uniform Resource Locator; address code for multimedia documents.

UTP - cable

Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium) cable. Cable to connect to a computer network.

VIPS

Viewing and Image Processing Station Unix based Processing Station

W/L

Window and Leveling of digital images.

X-Rite densitometer

Automatic density measuring instrument manufactured by XRite.





Document Number: DD+DIS219.06E

CR 35-X

Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0

Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN > 6000)

2nd edition


CR 35-X

Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0

Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN > 6000)

2nd edition


CR 35-X

Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0

Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN > 6000)

2nd edition


CR 35-X

Type 5158 / 100

CR 25.0

Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN > 6000)

2nd edition

Agfa CR35-CR25 Serice Manual

Recommend Documents